Nokia E72 User Manual
Nokia E72 User Guide Issue 2.2
DECLARATION OF CON FORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPOR ATION declares tha t this RM-529 product is in compliance with the es sential requ irements and other relevant provisions of Directiv e 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Decla ration of Conformity can be found at http://w ww.nokia.com/ phones/declaration _of_con formity /. é 2010 Nokia. All rights rese rved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Eser ies, No kia E72, and Navi are trademarks or regist ered trademarks of No kia Corporation. Noki a tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenam es of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, distrib ution, or storage of part or all of the cont ents in this document in any form with out the prior written permiss ion of Nokia is prohibited . Nokia operat es a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any o f the products describ ed in this document without prior notice. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. This p roduct is licens ed under the MPEG -4 Visu al Patent Portfol io Licens e (i) for personal and nonco mmercial us e in con nection with information which h as been encoded in co mpliance with the MPEG-4 Visua l Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and nonco mmercial activity and ( i i) for use in connectio n with MPEG-4 video pro vided by a lice nsed video prov ider. No lic ense is granted or shall be i mplied for any other u se. Additiona l information, including that related to promoti onal, internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXI MUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER N O CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY O F ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONS EQUENTIAL OR IN DIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CON TENTS OF T HIS DOCUME NT ARE PR OVIDED "A S IS". EXC EPT AS REQ UIRED BY APPLICAB LE LAW, N O WARRANT IES OF ANY K IND, EITH ER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED T O, THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MER CHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE MADE IN RE LA TION TO THE ACCURACY , RELIAB ILITY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOC UMENT. NOKI A RESERVE S THE RIG HT TO REVI SE THIS DOCUMENT O R WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TI ME WITHOUT P RIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the devi ce is prohibited to the extent permitted by applicab le law. Insofa r as this u ser gui de contains any limitations on Nokia's representations, wa rranties, damages and liab ilities, such limitations shall lik ewise limit any representations, warran ties, damages and liabilit ies of Nokia's licen sors. The thi rd-party applicat ions prov ided with your devic e may have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affili ated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrig hts or intellectual property rights to the third- party applications. As such, N okia does not take any responsibility for en d-user support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the applicatio ns or these materials. Nokia do es not provide a ny wa rranty for the third-party applications. B Y USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKN OWLEDGE THAT TH E APPLICATION S ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANT Y OF ANY K IND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMU M EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABL E LAW. YOU FURTHE R ACKNOWLEDG E THAT NEITHER N OKIA NOR ITS AF FILIATES MAKE ANY REPRE SENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMI TED TO WARRA NTIES OF TITL E, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICU LAR P URPOSE, OR THAT THE APPLICATION S WILL NOT IN FRINGE ANY T HIRD-PARTY P ATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARK S, OR OTHER RIG HTS.
The availability of particular p roducts an d applications and services for these prod uc ts may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details and availability of language optio ns. This device may contain commodities, tech nology or software subject to export la ws and regula tions from the US and other countries. Diversion contra ry to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, wh en using a telephon e in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Ind ustry Canada can require you to sto p using your telephone if such interferen ce cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local servic e facility . This devic e complies with par t 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device ma y not cause ha r mful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfer ence that may cau se undesired operation. Any changes or modific ations not expressly approved by Nokia could v oid the user's au thority to operate this equipment. /Issue 2.2 EN-US
Contents Safety.............. ..................... ............... ..............7 About your device........................................ .........................7 Network services.................. ..................... ........................ ....8 About Digital Rights Management............................. .........8 Battery removing......................................... .........................9 Find help................... .......................... ............10 Support................................................................................10 Update device software................................ .....................10 In-device help.. ................... .................. .................... ...........11 Accessibility solutions................................................. .......12 Do more with your device............... ........... ........... ............1 2 Settings................. ....................................... ........................12 Access codes................................................ ........................12 Prolong battery life........................ ............... ................... ..13 Free memory.......................................................................14 Get started........................... ...........................15 Insert the SIM card an d battery.............................. ...........15 Insert the memory card..................................... ................16 Remove the memory card.............. ................... .................16 Antenna locations............ ......................... ..........................16 Switch the device on or off................................................17 Charge the battery............... ........................................... ....17 Keys and parts................. ....................................... .............18 Headset........................... ..................................................... 19 Wrist strap........................................ ...................................19 Write text................. .................... .................... ................... .19 Nokia Switch...................................... .............................. ...20 Nokia Ovi Suite......... ...................................................... .....21 Visit Ovi by Nokia................................................................22 About Ovi Store...................................................................22 Your Nokia E72 ... ............ ............ ............ .......2 3 Key features.......... ....................... ..................... ...................23 Home screen.................. ..................... ....................... ..........23 One-touch keys................................ ............................. ......24 Optical Navi key..................................... ................... ..........25 Turn to silence calls or alarms ...........................................26 Calendar.................................... .......................................... .26 Contacts...............................................................................27 Multitasking....... ............... ................... .................. ..............29 Flashlight................................................................... ..........29 Make calls............................. ..........................30 Voice calls .......................................................................... .30 Options during a call.......................................... ................30 Voice mail............................................................................31 Answer or decline a call...................................... ...............31 Make a conference call.............................................. .........31 1-touch dial a phone number...... ...................... ................32 Call waiting............. ....................... ....................... ...............32 Call forw ard.........................................................................32 Call restrictions............................ .......................... .............33 Voice dialing............. ............................... ...................... ......33 Make a video call............... ........................ ...................... ....34 Options during a video call................... .............................35 Answer or decline a video call........................ ...................35 Video sharing......................................................................35 Log................. ..................... ................ ..................... .............38 Contents
Messaging............ ............... ................. ...........40 Messaging folders....................... ........................................40 Organize messages........ ........................ .............................40 E-mail service......................................................................41 E-mail.................................................................. .................41 Message reader...................................................................44 Speech................ ........................ .......................... ................44 Text and multimedia messag es............. ................... ........45 Special message types..................... ............... .............. .....48 Cell broadcast................................. .....................................48 Messaging settings. ............................................................49 About Chat................................ ...........................................51 Connectivity............. .................... ...................52 Data connections and access points.......................... .......52 Network settings....................................................... .........52 Wi-Fi/WLAN connection ......... ............... ............. ............... 53 Active data connections .....................................................55 Sync............................................................................ ..........55 Bluetooth connectivity.......... .............................................56 Data cable.................................. ..........................................59 PC connections....................................................................59 About home network.........................................................59 Internet....................... ........................ ...........61 Browse the web............................................ ......................61 Browser toolbar..................................................................61 Navigate pag es...................................... ............................. 62 Web feeds and blogs..........................................................62 Content search.............................................................. ......62 Bookmarks............ ..................... ....................... ................. ..63 Empty the cache................ ....................... .......................... .63 End the connection......... .................................. ..................63 Connection security............................................................63 Web settings ................................... ............................... .....64 Nokia Office Too ls.............. ...................... .......66 Active notes......................... ................................................66 Calculator................... .................................... ......................66 File manager.............................................. .........................67 Quickoffice........................... ......................................... .......67 Converter.............................................................................68 Zip manager........................................................................68 PDF reader...................................................................... .....68 Printing................... ........................................................ .....69 Dictionary....................................................................... .....70 Notes ...................... .................................................... .........70 Positioni ng (GPS)............................................72 About GPS............................................................................72 Assisted GPS (A-GPS)...........................................................72 Hold your device correctly...................... ................. ..........73 Tips on creating a GPS conn ection....................................73 Position requests...................... ..........................................73 Landmarks................... ........................................................74 GPS data............... .................................... ............................74 Positioning setting s.............. .................. ............... ............75 Maps....................... ................. ................... ....76 Maps overview............................................................ ........76 My position................................... .......................................76 Find places...... ................................. .............................. ......78 Manage places and routes.................................................79 Share location.....................................................................81 Drive and Walk............................................. .......................81 Maps shortcuts....................................................................84 Personalization.................. .............. ........... ...85 Contents
Profiles........................... ..................................................... .85 Select ringing tones..... ......................... ....................... .......85 Customize profiles..............................................................86 Customize the home screen.................. ............ .............. ..86 Change the display theme................................ .................87 Download a theme.............................................................87 Change audio themes......... ..................... .................... .......87 3-D ringing tones...... ..........................................................87 Media..............................................................89 Camera................................................ .................................89 Gallery..................................................................................92 Photos............................. ................................................ .....93 Share online.................................................. ......................97 Music player....................................... ......................... ......100 RealPlayer................... ............................ ...........................102 Recorder...................................... ......................................103 Flash player.......................................................................103 FM radio............................................................ .................104 Nokia Internet Radio............ ............................................105 Security and data mana gement...................107 Lock the device............................................. ....................107 Memory card security.......................................................107 Encryption.............................................. ...........................108 Fixed dialing............. ........................ ...................... ...........108 Certificate manager............ .............................................. 109 View and edit security modules.............. ........................110 Remote configuration.................................... ..................110 Application manager. .................................. .....................111 Licenses........................................... ..................................113 Sync........................... ......................................................... 114 Mobile VPN............................... ...................... ...................115 Settings............... ........... ............. ........... ......117 General settings.............. ........................................ ..........117 Telephone settings........ ...................................................120 Connection settings..... ......................... ............................ 122 Application settings............................ .............. ...............129 Shortcuts................... .............. ........... ..........130 General shortcuts............ ................... ................... ............130 Glossary............................................ ............132 Troubleshooting......... ............. ................. ....135 Green tips.................. ................. ..................138 Save energy................................. ......................................138 Recycle...............................................................................138 Product and safety information.................. .139 Index................... ............. ................. ...........145 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESI STANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the UMTS 850, 1900, and 2100 MHz networks, and GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 MHz networks . Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your device supports severa l connectivity methods an d like computers may be expo sed to viruses and other harmful conten t. Exercise caution wit h messages, connectivity requests, brow sing, and downloads. Only install and use services a nd software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and protection, such as applications that are Symbian S igned or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites an d may allow you to access third-party sites. These are n ot affiliated with Noki a, and Nokia does not endorse o r assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take precauti ons for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the devi ce mu st be switched on. Do 7 Safety
not switch the device on wh en wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent some images, music, an d other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecti ng to any other devi ce, read its user guide for detailed safety inst ructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Refer to the user guide fo r other important information about your device. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some featur es are not available on all networks; other features may require th at you make specific arrangements with yo ur service provider to use them. Network services invo lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roami ng on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limi tations that affect how you can use some features of this device requiring network support such as suppo rt for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and language-d ependent characters. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not act i vated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have customized items such as menu names, menu order, and icons. About Digital Rights Management When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legi timate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent you from copying, modifying, or transferring images, music, and other co ntent. Content owners may use differe nt types of digital rights management (DRM) tech nologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyright s. This device uses various types of DRM software to access D RM- protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10 and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM software's a bility to access new DRM- protected content be revo ked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM- protected content alr eady in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of co ntent protected with other types of DRM or the use o f non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights ma nagement (DRM) protect ed content comes with an ass ociated lice nse th at defines your rights to use the content. 8 Safety
If your device has OM A DRM-protected co ntent, to back up both the license and the cont ent, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. Other transfer methods may not tran sfer the licenses which need to be restored wi th the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the license in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-protected co ntent, both the license and the content will be lost if the device mem ory is formatted. You may also lose the license and th e content if the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losing the license or the content may limit yo ur ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licenses may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Battery removing Switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 9 Safety
Find help For local services and warran ty information, please refer to the separate booklet. Support When you want to learn more about how to use your product or you are unsure how your dev ice should function, go to w ww.nokia.com/support , or using a cellular phone, www.noki a.mobi/support. You can also select Menu > Applicatio ns > Help > Help in your devic e. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and swit ch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolved, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia.com/repair , or in Latin America, www.nokia-latinoamerica.com/ centrosdeservicio. Before sending your device for repair , always back up the data in your device. Update device software About device software and application updates With device softw are updates and applic ation updates, you can get new features and enhanced function s for your device. Updating the software may also improve your device's performance. It is recommended that you back up your personal data before updating your device software. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use t he device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting installation of an update. Downloading soft ware updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). 10 Find help
Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. After you update your device software or applications, the instructions in the user guide ma y no longer be up to date. Software updates over the air Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > SW update . With Software update (netwo rk service), you can check if there are updates available fo r your device software or applications, and download th em to your device. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is complet ed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting installati on of an update. After updating your device software or applications using Software update, the instru ctions related to the updated applications in the user guid e or the helps may no longer be up to date. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Start up date â Download the available updates . To unmark specific updates that you do not want to download, select the updates from the list. ⢠Update v ia PC â Update your device using a PC. This option replaces the Start update option when updates are only available using th e Nokia Software Updater PC application. ⢠View details â View information on an update. ⢠View update history â View the status of previous updates. ⢠Settings â Change the settings, such as the default access point used for downloading updates. ⢠Disclaimer â View the Nokia licenc e agreement. Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that en ables you to update your device so ftware. To update yo ur device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible US B data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater applicat ion, go to www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate, or in La tin America, www.nokia- latinoamerica.com/nsu. In-device help Your device contains instructions t o help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access th e help text for the current view, select Options > Help . 11 Find help
When you are reading the instructions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font si ze . You may find links to related topics at the end of the help text. If you select an underl ined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts use the following indicators: Link to a related h elp topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the application that is open in the background, select Options > Show ope n apps. and the desired application. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones ea sy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information, visit the N okia website at www.nokiaaccessibility. com. Do more with your device There are various applications provided by Nokia and third party software developers, th at help you do more with your device. To find and download applications, visit the Ovi Store at store.ovi.com. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the product support pages at www.n okia.com/support or y our local Nokia website. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, stre aming, and mobile internet settings automatica lly configured, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your serv ice providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service prov iders as a s pecial message. You can change the general se ttings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. ⢠Personal identification number (PIN) code â Protect your device and SIM card a gainst unauthorized use. The PIN code (4 - 8 digits) is usually supplied wi th the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. ⢠UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by 3G cellular phones. ⢠PIN2 code â This code (4 - 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device. ⢠Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device a gainst unauthorized use. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the code, and set the device to 12 Find help
request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. Additional charges may apply, and all the personal data in your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care Point or your device dealer. ⢠Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with th e SIM card, contact the network service provider whose SIM card is in your device. ⢠UPUK code â This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the network service provider whose USIM card is in your device. ⢠International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number â This number (15 or 17 digits) is used to identify valid devices on the GSM network. Devices that are, for example, stolen, ca n be blocked from ac cessing the network. The IMEI number for y our device can be found under the battery. Prolong battery life Many features in your devi ce increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, observe the following: ⢠Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background w hile using other features, increase th e demand on battery power. Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the back ground while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power. The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect, not connected to another a ccess point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device not sca n, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connectio n settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the devi ce periodically tries to establish a GPRS connection . To prolong the operating time of your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠The Maps appli cation downloads new ma p information when you scroll to new areas on the ma p, which increases the demand on battery power. You can prevent th e automatic download of new map s. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeated ly. This incr eases th e demand on bat tery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the n etwork settings, the device searches for the 3G network. You can set the device to use on ly the GSM network. To use only the GSM network, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Netwo rk > Network mode > GSM . ⢠The backlight of the displa y increases the demand on battery power. In the disp lay setting s, you can chan ge the length of the time-out peri od after which the 13 Find help
backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalization > Display > Light t ime-out . To adju st the light sens or that observes lighting condit ions and adjusts t he display brightness, in th e display settings, s elect Light sensor . ⢠To save power, activate the power save mode. P ress the power key, and select Activate power s aving . To deactivate it, press the power key, and select Deactivate power saving . You may not be able to change the sett ings of ce rtain applications when the power save mode is activated. Free memory To view how much m emory is available for different data types, select Menu > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if available memory is low. To free memory, transfer data to an alternative memory (if available) or compatible computer. To remove data you no long er need, use File manager or the respective application. You can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Application manager that y ou do not need ⢠Installation files (w ith .sis or .sisx file extensions) of installed applications. Back up the inst allat ion files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Photos. 14 Find help
Get started Insert the SIM card and battery Important: Do not use a mini-UICC SIM card, also known as a micro-SIM card, a micro-SIM card with an adapter, or a SIM card that has a mini-UICC cutout (see figure) in this device. A micro- SIM card is smaller than the standard SIM card. This device does not support th e use of micro-SIM cards and use of incompatible SIM cards may damage the card or the de vice, and may corrupt data stored on the card. Sa fe r em o va l . A lw a ys sw i tc h th e de vi ce o ff an d disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1. Remove the back cover. 2. Remove the battery, if insert ed. 3. Pull out the SIM card holder and insert the SIM card. Ensure that the gold-colored contact area on the card faces downwards and that th e bevelled corner of the card faces the bevelled corner of the holder. Pus h the SIM card holder back in place. 4. Align the battery contacts with the battery compartment connectors, and ins ert the battery. 5. Replace the back cover. 15 Get started
Insert the memory card Use only compatible micr oSD and microSDHC cards approved by Nokia for use with th is device. Nokia uses approved industry s tandards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully comp atible with this device. Incompatible cards may dama ge the card and the device and corrupt data stored on the card. A memory card may already be inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1. Insert a compatible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the ca rd is facing up and towards the sl ot. 2. Push the ca rd in. You can hea r a click when the card locks into place. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when th e card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1. Before you remove the me mory card, press the power key, and select Remov e memory c ard . All applications are closed. 2. Whe n Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3. Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displ ayed. 4. Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5. Pull out the memory card, and close the memory card slot cover. If the device is switched on, select OK . Antenna locations Your device may have internal and exte rnal antennas. Avoid touching the anten na area unnecessaril y while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with antennas affects the communicat ion quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. 16 Get started
Switch the device on or off Switch on 1. Press and h old the power k ey. 2. If prompted, enter a PIN code or lock code, and select OK . T he preset lock code is 12345. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Ca re point or your device dealer. Switch off â Press the power key br iefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the battery Your battery has been partially charged at the factory. If the device indicates a low charge, do the following: 1. Connect the charger to a wall ou tlet. 2. Connect the charger to the device. If you are using a USB charger, connect the charger plug to the USB connector. 3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specifi c length of time, and you can use t he de vice while it is charging. If the battery is com pletely disc harged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator a ppears on the display or before any calls can be made. Charging with the USB data cable Charging with the USB da ta cable is slower than charging with the charger. Charging with the USB data cable may not work if you us e a USB hub. US B hubs may be incompatible for charging a USB device. When the USB data cable is connected, you can transfer data at the same time as charging. 1. Connect a compatible USB de vice to your device using a compatible USB data cable. Depending on the type of the device that is used for charging, it may ta ke a while for charging to s tart. 2. If the device is switched on, select from the available USB modes. 17 Get started
Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Headset connector 3 â Earpiece 4 â Optical Navi⢠key (scroll key) 5 â Selection key 6 â Call key 7 â Microphone 8 â Keypad 9 â End key 10 â Selection key 11 â Light sensor 12 â Secondary camera 1 â Function key. 2 â Shift key 3 â Sym key. 4 â Backspace key 5 â Enter key 6 â Control key 1 â Micro USB connector 2 â Memory card slot 3 â Volume up key 4 â Voice key 5 â Volume down key 18 Get started
Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The su rface of this device contains stainless steel. During extended operation su ch as an active video call and high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working proper ly, take it to th e nearest authorized service facility. Headset You can conn ect a compatible h eadset or compat ible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. To make handsfree phone calls, use a headset with a compatible remote control unit, or u se the microphone on the device. Warning: W hen you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety . Wrist strap Thread the wrist strap, an d tighten it. Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to differe nt sales markets. Write text with the keyboard Your device has a full keyboard. To insert punctuation ma rks, press the corresponding key or a combination of keys. To switch between the differen t character cases, press the Shift key. To insert digits or characters printed at the top of keys, press and hold the corresponding key, or press and hold the function key and pres s the corresponding key. To erase a character, press the backs pace key. To erase several characters, p ress and hold the backspace key. To insert characters an d symbols that are not shown on the keyboard, press the Sym key. To copy text, press and hold the Sh ift key, and scroll to highlight the word, phrase, or line of text you want to copy. Press Ctr l C . To insert the text into a document, move to the correct place, and press Ctrl V . 19 Get started
To change the writing langua ge , or to activate predictive text input, select Optio ns > Input options and from th e available option s. Nokia Switch Copy content from your old device You can use the Switch applic ation to copy content such as phone numbe rs, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous compatible Nokia device to your new devic e. Copy content for the first time 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . 2. Pai r the tw o devi ces. To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. Yo u are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices ar e now paired. If your old Nokia device does not have the Switch application, your new device sends it in a message. Open the message in the old device, and follow the instructions on the display. 3. On your device, select the content yo u want to tran sfer from the other device. When the transfer has sta rted, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. The type of content that ca n be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that devi ce supports synchroni zation, you can also synchronize data between the device s. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. Synchronize, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronize content between your device and th e other device, if the other devi ce supports synchronization. The synchronization is two-way . If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cann ot restore deleted items with synchroniz ation. 20 Get started
to retrieve content from the other device to your device. With retrieval, content is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to ke ep or delete the original content in the other device, depending on the device model. t o s e n d c o n t e n t f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o y o u r o t h e r d e v i c e If you cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia in your devi ce. When you selec t the folder to transfer, the item s are synchronized in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Options > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every tr ansfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in th e main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conf licts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attemp ts to merg e the changes automatically. If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Prio rity to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. Nokia Ovi Suite Nokia Ovi Suite is a set of a pplications th at you can install to a compatible PC. O vi Su ite groups all available applications in a launcher window from which you can open the applications. Ovi Sui te may be included on a memory card, if provided with your device. You can use Ovi Suite to syn chronize contacts, cale ndar, and to-do and other notes between your device and a compatible PC applicat ion. You can also use Ovi Suit e to transfer bookmarks between your device and compatible browsers, and tran sfer imag es and videos between your device and a compat ible PC. Pay attention to synchronizat ion settings. Data deletion as part of normal synchron ization process is determined by the settings selected. To use Ovi Suite, you need a PC that runs Microsoft Windows XP (SP2 or newer) or Windows Vista (SP1 or newer), and is compatible with a USB data cable or with Bluetooth connectivity. Ovi Suite is not compatible with Apple Macintosh computers. For further information on Ovi Suite, see the built-in help, or go to www.nokia.com/ support. Install Nokia Ovi Suite 1. Ensure the memory card is inserted in your Nokia E72. 2. Connect the USB cable. Your PC recognizes the new device and installs the necessary drivers. This can take several minutes to complete. 21 Get started
3. Sele ct Mass storage as the USB connection mode in your device. Your device is displayed in the Windows file browser as a Removable Disk. 4. Open the root of the me mory card drive with the Windows file browser, and select the Ovi Suite installation file. 5. The installation is started. Follow the instructions. Tip: To update Ovi Suite, or if you have problems when installing Ovi Suit e from the memory card, copy the installation file to your PC, and install from your PC. Visit Ovi by Nokia With Ovi by Nokia, you can find new places and services, and stay in touch wit h your friends. You can do, for example, the following: ⢠Create a mail account ⢠Plan trips and view locations on a map ⢠Download games, applicat ions, videos, and ringing tones to your device ⢠Purchase music The available services may vary by country or region, and not all languages are supported. To access Nokia's Ovi se rvices, go to www.ovi. com, and register yo ur own Nokia account. For more information, go to www.ovi.com/support . About Ovi Store With Ovi Store, you ca n download mobile games, applications, videos, pictu res, themes, and ringing tones to your device. Some items are free of charge; others you n e e d t o p a y f o r w i t h y o u r c r e d it c a r d o r i n y o u r p h o n e b i l l . The availability of paymen t methods depends on your country of residence and your network service provider. Ovi Store offers content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. 22 Get started
Your Nokia E72 Your new Nokia Eseries dev i ce contains new versions of the Calendar, Con tacts, and E-mail applic ations, as w ell as a new home screen. Key features Your new Nokia E72 h elps you man age your busi ness and personal information. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Read and reply to your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date and plan your meetings with the Calendar app lication. Manage your business part ners and free time friends with the Contacts application. Connect to a wireless LAN (WLA N) with the WLAN wizard application. Work with documents, sprea dsheets, and presentations with the Quickoffice applicati on. Find points of interest with the Maps application. Switch from business to personal mode. Edit the appearance and setu p of your home screen with the Modes application. Browse y our comp any intran et with the Intranet application. Move your contact and calendar i nformation from a previous device to your Nokia E72 with the Switch application. Check the available updates for ap plications and download them to your device with the Software update application. Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Home screen Home screen In the home sc reen, you can quickly a ccess your most frequently used application s, and view at a gl ance if you have missed calls or new messages. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. 23 Your Nokia E 72
The home screen consists of the following: 1. Application shortcuts. To access an application, select the shortcut of the application. 2. Information area. To check an item displayed in the information area, select the item. 3. Notification area . To view the notifications, scroll to a box. A box is only visible if there are items in it. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, for example, one screen to show your business e-mail and notifications, and another to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not have to see business- related messages outside office hours. To switch between the home screens, select . To define which items and sh ortcuts you wa nt in the home screen, and to set the appearance of the h ome screen, select Menu > Ctrl. panel an d Modes . Work on the home screen To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering the contact's name. Select the desired contact from t he list of proposed matches. This fe ature may not be av ailable in all languages. To call the contact, press the ca ll key. To disable the contact search, select Options > Contact search off . To check your received messages, select the message box in the notification area. To rea d a message, select the message. To access other tasks, scroll right. To view your missed calls, select the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, select a call, and press the call key. To send a text message to a caller, select a call, scroll right, and select Send messa ge from the list of available actions. T o l i s t e n t o y o u r v o i c e m a i l , s e lect the voice mail box in the notification area. Select the desired voice mailbox, an d press the call key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys, you can access appli cations and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an application or a task. To change these, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalization > One-tou ch keys . Your service provider may have assigned applications to the keys, i n which case you cannot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts k ey 3 â Calendar key 24 Your Nokia E 72
4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home scre en, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access th e menu. To view the list of active applications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the li st. To open the selected application, press the home key for a few seconds or press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts app lication, press the cont acts key briefly. To create a new contact, press t he contacts key for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default ma ilbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Optical Navi key To browse and na vigate web pages and map s, and to scroll through lists, slide your finger on the Optical Navi key (scroll key). To scroll through a list, one item at a time, slide your finger slowly on the scroll key. To sc roll through a list, many items at a time, or to move around on the display, slide your finger quickly on the scroll key. Capture images â To autofocus in camera, hold your finger on the scroll key. To capture an image, press the scroll key. Optical Navi key settin gs â To activate or deactivate the Optical Navi key or modify other setting s, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalizati on > Optical Navi key . 25 Your Nokia E 72
Turn to silence calls or alarms When you have activated the sens ors in your device, you can silence incoming calls or snooze alarms by turning the device face down. To define the turning options, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Senso rs > Turning control . Calendar About Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . With cale ndar, you ca n create and view scheduled events and appointments, and switch between different calendar views. In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Annivers ary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entrie s of the selected day are displayed as a list. To open calendar entries, select a calendar v iew and an entry. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to acce ss a list of available actions. T o close the list, scroll left. Create calendar entries Select Menu > Calendar . You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that have a specif ic date and tim e. ⢠Meeting requests are in vitations that you can send to the participants. Before you can create meeting requests you must have a compatible mailbox configured to your device. ⢠Memo entries are relate d to the whole day but not to a specif ic tim e of th e day. ⢠Anniversary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task that has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, select a date, Options > New entry , and the entry type. To set the priority for meeting entries, select Options > Priority . To define how the ent ry is handled during synchronization, select Private to hide the ent ry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers, or None to not copy the entry to your computer. To send the entr y to a compatible dev ice, select Options > Send . To make a meeting request fr om a meeting entry, select Options > Add participants . Create meeting requests Select Menu > Calendar . 26 Your Nokia E 72
Before you can create meeting requests, you must have a compatible mailbox configured for your device. To create a meeting entry: 1. To create a meeting en try, select a day and Op tions > New entry > Meeting re quest . 2. Enter the names of the re qu ired participants. To add names from your contacts list , enter the firs t few characters, and select from the proposed m atches. To add optional part icipants, select Options > Add optional particip ants . 3. Enter the subject . 4. Enter the start and end times an d dates, or select All- day event . 5. Enter the location. 6. Set an alarm for the entry, if needed. 7. For a recurring meeting, se t the recurrence time, and enter the end date. 8. Enter a description. To set the priority for th e meeting request, select Options > Priority . To send the meeting request, select Options > Send . Calendar views Select Menu > Calendar . You can switc h between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and the calen dar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events fo r the selected day grouped into time slots accordin g to their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the even ts for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Options > Change view and the desired view. Tip: To open the week vi ew, select the week number. To move to the next or the previous day in month, week, day, and agenda view, select the desired day. To change the default view, select Options > Settings > Default view . Contacts About Contacts Select Menu > Contacts . With Contacts, yo u can save and update contact information, such as phon e numbers, home addresses, and e-mail addresses of your contacts. Y ou can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbna il image to a contact. You can also create contact group s, which allow you to communicate with several con tacts at the same time, and send contact information to compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. 27 Your Nokia E 72
Work with contacts Select Menu > Contacts . To create a contact, select Options > New contact , and enter the details of the contact. To copy contacts from the memory card, i f available, select Options > Create backup > Memory card to phone . To search for contacts, start enteri ng the contact's name in the search field. Create contact groups Select Menu > Contacts . 1. To create a contact group, scroll to each contact you want to add to t he group, and select Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark . 2. Sele ct Options > Group > Add to group > Cre ate new group , and enter a name for the group. If you wan t to make con ference calls to th e group us ing a conference service, define the following: ⢠Conf. service number â Enter the conference call service number. ⢠Conf. service ID â Enter the conference call ID. ⢠Conf. service PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code. To make a conference call to the group using the conference service, se lect the group, scroll right, an d select Call conf. service . Search for contacts in a remote databa se To activate remote contact search, select Optio ns > Settings > Contacts > Remote search server . You must define a remote server before you can do remote contact s earches. To search for contacts in a remote database, select Contacts > Options > Search from remote . Enter the name of the contact you want to search for, a nd select Search . The device establishe s a data connection to the remote d atabase. To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering characters in the home screen, and select the database from the proposed matches. To change th e remote contac ts database, s elect Options > Settings > Contacts > Remote search server . This setting affects the database use d in the Contacts and Calendar applications and t he home screen, but not the database that is used for e-mail. Add ringing tones for co ntacts Select Menu > Contacts . To add a ringing tone for a contact, select the contact, Options > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. T he ringing tone sounds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for a contact group, select t he contact g roup, Options > Group > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. 28 Your Nokia E 72
To remove the ringing to ne, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Contacts settings Select Menu > Contacts . To edit the settings of t he Contacts application, select Options > Settings > Contacts and from the following: ⢠Contacts t o display â Show contacts that are stored in the device memory, on the SIM card, or both. ⢠Default saving memory â Select where to save contacts. ⢠Name disp lay â Change the way contacts' n ames are displayed. This setting is no t available for all languages. ⢠Default contact list â S e l e c t w h i c h c o n t a c t s l i s t o p e n s when you open the Contacts application. This setti ng is only available when there is more than one contacts list. ⢠Remote search ser ver â Change the remote con tacts database. This option is available only if remote contacts databases are supported by your service provider. Multitasking You can have several applicat ions open at the same time. To switch between acti ve applications, p ress and hold th e home key, scroll to an application, and press th e scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an acti ve phone call and want to check your calendar, press the home key to access the menu, an d open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, and open th e Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your message, press and hold the home key, scroll to the message and press the scroll key. Flashlight The camera flash can be used as a flashlight. To switch the flashlight on or off, in the ho me screen, press and hold the space bar. Do not point the flashlight at a nyone's eye. 29 Your Nokia E 72
Make calls Voice calls 1. In the home screen, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press the backspace key. For international calls, p ress ( replaces the international access code) , and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. The character as a replacement for the international access code may not work in all regions. In this case, en ter the international access code directly. 2. To make the call, press the call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt ), press the end key. Pressing the end key always en ds a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from the contacts list, select Menu > Contacts . Scroll to the desired na me, or enter the first letters or characters of the na me in the search field. To call the contact, press the call key . If you have saved sev eral numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press th e call key. Options during a call To adj ust th e v olu me dur in g a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You can also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute first. To send an image or a video in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in 3G networks only). You can edit the me ssage and change the recipien t before sending. Press the call key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Optio ns > Hold . To switch between the ac tive and the held call, select Options > Swap . To send touch tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send touch tones . Enter the touch tone string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pause charac ter (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add touch tones to the phone number or touch tone fields in a contact card. Tip: When you have only one activ e voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key again. During an acti ve call, to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudsp eaker . If you have a ttached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connect ivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate handsfree . To switch 30 Make calls
back to the ha ndset, select Options > Activate handset . To end an active call and replace it by answerin g the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that yo u can use during a voice call are network services. Voice mail Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application (network service) for the firs t time, you are asked to enter t he number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mailbox, scroll to Voice mailbox , and select Options > Call voice mailbox . To call your video mailbox, scroll to Video mailbox , and select Options > Call video mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, to call the mailbox, scroll to the mailbox, and select Options > Call internet call mbx. . To call your mailbox in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. Select the mailbox you want to call. To change the mai lbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. To mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call fo rwarding > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to fo rward calls, declining an incoming call also forwards the call. When you selec t Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message w ithout rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send message . To activate or deactivate rejecting calls with a text message, s elect Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Phone > Call > Decline call with m sg. . To edit the content of the message se nt to the caller, select Message text . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to the firs t participant. 2. To make a call to another p articipant, select Op tions > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3. When the new call is an swered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports confer ence calls 31 Make calls
between a maximum of six partici pants, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant , and select Private . The conference call is put o n hold on your device. The other participants can still continue the conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Conference to return to the conference call. To drop a participant, select Opt ions > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4. To end the active conferen ce call, press the end key. 1-touch dial a phone number To activate t he feature, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > 1-touch dialing . 1. To assign a phone number to one of the number keys (2-9), selec t Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > 1- touch . 2. Scroll to the key to which you want to ass ign the phone number, and select Opti ons > Assign . 1 is reserved for the voice or video mailbox. To call an assigned number, in the home screen, press the assigned key and then the call key. Call waiting You can answer a call while you h ave another call in progress. To activate ca ll wa iting (network service), select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Cal l > Call wait ing . To answer the waiting call, pr ess the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between th e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an acti ve call and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Optio ns > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Call forward Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Phone > Call forwarding . Forward incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select the type of calls to forward and from the following options: ⢠All voice calls or All fax calls â Forward all incoming voice or fax calls. You cann ot answer the calls, only forward the calls to another number. ⢠If busy â Forward incoming calls if you have an active call. ⢠If not answer ed â Forward incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the length of time for the device to ring before forwarding the call. 32 Make calls
⢠If out of reach â Forward calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Forward calls if you have an active call, do not answer, or the device is switched off or out of network coverage. To forward calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type, a forwarding option, and Options > A ctivate > To voice mailbox . To forward calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type, a forwarding option, and Options > Activate > To other number . Enter the number, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts. To check the current forwarding status, s croll to the forwarding option, and select Opt ions > Check stat us . To stop forwarding calls, scro ll to the forwarding option, and select Option s > Deactiv ate . Call restrictions Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Setti ngs and Phone > Call restriction . If you have defined internet call settings, select Internet call restrict ion . You can restrict the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To modify the settings, you need the restriction password from your service provider. Call restriction affe cts all call types. Select from the following v oice call restriction settings: ⢠Outgoing calls â Prevent making voice calls with your devic e. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Internat ional calls â Prev ent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls if roaming â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to hom e country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call restrictions, select the restriction option and Options > Check status . To deactivate all voice call rest rictions, selec t a restriction option and Options > Deact. all restrictions . To change the password used for restricting voice and fax calls, select Option s > Edit restrict ion passwd. . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The restriction password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not depend ent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so you do not need to record voice tags in advance. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in the contacts, and comp ares the spoken voice ta g to it . The voice recognition in the device adapts to the ma in userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name that is saved for the contact. To listen to the syn thesized voice tag, select a contact and Opti ons > Voice tag details . Scroll to a contact detail, and se lect Optio ns > Play voi ce tag . 33 Make calls
Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice di aling in all circumstances . When you use voice dialing, th e loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the right selection key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is atta ched, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialing. 2. A short tone sounds, and Speak now is d is p la ye d. S ay clearly the name that is saved for the contact. 3. The device plays a synthesi zed voice tag for the recognized contact, and displa ys the name and number. If you do not want to ca ll that contact, select another contact from the list of ma tches within 2.5 seconds, or, to cancel , select Quit . If several numbers are saved for a name, the device selects the default number, if defi ned. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number in a contact card. You can also say the name and telephone nu mber type, such as cellular or home. Make a video call When you make a video call (n etwork service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you an d the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recip ient . T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h a v e a U S I M c a r d and be in the coverage of a 3G net work. For availability of and subscription to video call services, cont act your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. indicates that you have denied video sending from your device. To send an image instead, select Menu > Ct rl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a vide o call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video call, enter the ph one number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Sele ct Opti ons > Call > Video ca ll . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video imag e is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a n ormal call or send a text or mu ltimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background grap hic. 34 Make calls
3. To end the video call, press the end key. Options during a video call To change between showing vi deo or hearing only sound, select Options > Enable , or Di sable and the desired option. To use the main camera to send video, select Op tions > Use main camera . To switch back to the secondary camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To take a snapshot of the vi deo you are sending, select Options > S end snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the re cipient. The snapshot is not saved. Press Cancel to resume sending video. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To route the au dio to a comp atible headset with Bluetooth connectivity attached to your device, select Option s > Activate handsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Options > Activate handset . To change the video quality, select Options > Video preference . Normal qu ality is framerate 10 fps. Use Clearer detail for small, static details. Use Smoother motion for moving i mages. To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow video image to be sen t to caller? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you on ly hear the sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen wi th a still image captured by the camera in you r device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > Im age in video call . To end the video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use video sharing (ne twork service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate video sha ring. If you do not want to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a comp atible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to hig h volume may damage your hearin g. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. 35 Make calls
Video sharing requirements Video sharing requires a 3G connection. For more information on the service, 3G network availability, and fees associated with usin g this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠Ensure you have an active 3G connection and are within 3G network coverage. If y ou move ou tside the 3G network during a video s h aring session, the sharing stops while your voi ce call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recip ient are registered to the 3G networ k. If you invite someone to a sharing session and t he recipientâÂÂs device is not within 3G netw ork coverage, does not hav e video sharing installed, or person -to-person connections set up, the recipient does no t receive invitations. You receive an error message that indicate s that the recipient cannot accept the invitation . Settings To set up video sharing, yo u need person-to-person and 3G connection settings. Person-to- person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a contact card: 1. Sele ct > Contacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a n ew card for that person). 3. Sele ct Opti ons > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@ domainnam e (you can us e an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do n ot know the S IP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). 3G connection settings To set up your 3G connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the 3G network. ⢠Ensure that your device 3G access poin t connection settings are configured properly. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1. To share live video during the call, select Live vid eo . To share a video clip, select Video clip and the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If your device notifies you 36 Make calls
that the video c lip must be converted, select OK . Your device must have a video ed itor for the conversion t o work. 2. If the recipient has seve ral SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code saved in the contacts list, select the desired a ddress or number. If the SIP address or phone numb er of the recipient is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send th e invitation. Your device sends the in vitation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automatica lly when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing Zoom the video (available for sender only). Adjust the brightness (available for sender only). or Mu te or unmute the microp hone. or Turn the loudspeaker on and off. or Pause and resume video sharing. Switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only). 3. To end the sharing session, select St op . To end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you sh ared, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the memory location of the saved video. To define the preferred memor y location, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Video sharing > Preferred saving memory . If you access oth er applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paus ed. To return to the video sharing view, and to cont inue sharing, in the home screen, select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone se nds you a video sharing i nvitation, the invitation messag e displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it ri ngs when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invita tion and you are not within UMTS network cov erage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: ⢠Yes â Accep t the invitation, and a ctivate the sharing session. ⢠No â Reject the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can also press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To mute the vid eo on your device, select Optio ns > Mute . To play the video at the original volume, select Options > Original volume . This does not affect the audio playback of the other party of the phone call. To end the sharing session, se lect Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you end the call, also video sharing ends. 37 Make calls
Log The log stores inform ation about the communication history of the device. The device regis ters missed and received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions , the device is switched on, an d within the netw ork service area. Recent calls Select Menu > Log and Recent calls . To view missed, received, and dialed calls, select Missed calls , Received call s or Dialed numbers . Tip: To open the dialed numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠Save to Cont acts â Save the highlighted pho ne number from a recent calls list to your contacts. ⢠Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. ⢠Delete â Clear a hi ghlighted ev ent in the selected list. ⢠Settings â S e l e c t Log duration an d the length of tim e that the communica tion inform ation is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Log . To view the approximate durati on of your last call, and dialled and received calls, select Call timers . Packet data Select Menu > Log . You may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. To ch eck the amount of data sent or re ceived during packet data connections, select Packet data > All sent data or All received data . To clear both sent and received information, select Options > Clear counters . You need the lock code to clear the information. Monitor all communicat ion events Select Menu > Log . To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireles s LAN connections registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text messa ge sent in mo re than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Co nnections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging center or web pages are sho wn as packet data connections. To view how much data was tra nsferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View . To copy a ph one number from the log to the clipboard, a nd paste it into a text message, for example, select Options > Use number > Copy . 38 Make calls
To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To set the log duration, select Options > Sett ings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register and messagi ng delivery reports are permanently deleted. 39 Make calls
Messaging Select Menu > Messaging . In Messag ing (network servic e), you can send and receive text messages, multimedia messages , audio messages, and e-mail messages. You can also receive web service messages, cell broadcast m essages, an d special mes sages containing data, and send service commands. Before sending or receivin g messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network su pports the messaging features you want to use and that they are a ctivated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access poin t settings on the device. ⢠Define the e-mail account sett ings on the device. ⢠Define the text mes sage settings on the device. ⢠Define the multimedia message settings on the device. The device may recognize the SIM car d provider and automati cally configu re some of the mes sage settings . If not, you may need to define the sett ings manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Select Menu > Messaging . Messages and data received using Bluetooth connectivity are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox folder. Messages that you have been writing can be stored in th e Drafts folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in the Outbox folder, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and mu ltimedia messages you have sent (network service), s elect Options > Settings > Text message > Receive report or Multimedia message > Receive reports . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Organize messages Select Menu > Messaging and My folders . To create a new folder to or ganize your messages, select Options > New folder . 40 Messaging
To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folde r . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to anothe r folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Options > Sort by . To view the properties of a message, select the message and Options > Message details . E-mail service The e-mail service automatica lly pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E72 . You can read, respond to, and or ganize your e-mail on the go. The e-mail service works wi th a number of internet e- mail providers that are ofte n used for personal e-mail. This service must be suppor ted by your network and may not be available in all count ries or regions. For availability, contact your service provider. Set up e-mail on yo ur device 1. Select Menu > Email > New mai lb. . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. If requested, allow your device to connect to the inter net. 4. Select your e-mail service provider or account type. 5. Enter the required account details, such a s e-mail address and password. The e-mail service ca n run on your device even if y ou have installed other e-mail applic ations, such as Mail for Exchange. E-mail Set up your e-mail With the Nokia e-mail wizard, you can set up your corporate e-mail account, such as Microsoft Outlook, Mail for Exchange, or Intellisync , and your internet e-mail account. When setting up your corporate e-mail, you may be prompted for the name of the server associated with your e-mail address. For deta ils, contact your comp any IT department. 1. To open the wizard, in the home screen, select Set up e-mail . 2. Enter your e-mail address and password. If the wizard is not able to configure your e-mail settings automatica lly, you need to se lect your e-mail account type, and enter the related account se ttings. If your device contains any additional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you open the wizard. Send e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . 1. Select your mailbox and Options > Create email . 2. In the To field, enter the recipient's e-mail address. If the recipient's e-mail addre ss can be found in Contacts, 41 Messaging
start entering the recipien t's name, and select the recipient from the proposed matches. If you add several recip ients, insert ; to separa te the e-mail addresses. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. If the Bcc field is not visible, selec t Option s > More > Show Bcc field . 3. In the Subject field, ente r the subject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your message i n the text area. 5. Sele ct Options and from the following: ⢠Add attachment â Add an at tachment to the message. ⢠Priority â Set the priority of the message. ⢠Flag â Flag the message for follow-up. ⢠Insert te mplate â Insert text from a template. ⢠Add recipient â Add recipients to the message from Contacts. ⢠Editing options â Cut, copy, or paste the selected text. ⢠Input options â Activate or deactivate predictive text input, or select the wri ting language. 6. Sele ct Options > Send . Available opt ions may vary . Add attachments Select Menu > Messaging . To write an e-mail message, select your mailbox and Options > Create email . To add an attachment to the e-mai l message, select Options > Add attachment . To remove the selected attachmen t, select Options > Remove attachmen t . Read e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail mess age, select the mai lbox, and select the message from the list. To reply to the message sender, select Options > Reply . To reply to the sender and all other recipients, select Options > Reply to all . To forward the message, select Options > Forward . Download attachments Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To view the attachments in a received e-mail message, scroll to th e attachment field, and select Options > Actions . If there is one attachme nt in the message, se lect Open to open the attachm ent . If there are several attachments, select View list to see a list showing which attachments have been downloaded. To download the selected attachment or all the attachments from the list to your device, select O ptions > Actions > Download or Download al l . The attachmen ts are not saved in your device, and are deleted when yo u delete the mes sage. 42 Messaging
To save the selected att achment or all the downloaded attachments in your device, select Optio ns > Action s > Save or Save all . To open the selected, down loaded attachment, select Options > Actions > Ope n . Reply to a meeting reques t Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. Select a received meeting request, Options , and from the following: ⢠Accept â Accept the meeting request. ⢠Declin e â Decline the meeting request. ⢠Forward â Forward the meetin g request to another recip ient . ⢠Remove from calendar â Remove a canceled meeting from your calendar. Search for e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To search for items within the recipients, subjects, and body texts of the e-mail messages in the mailbox, select Options > Search . To stop the search, select Optio ns > Stop search . To start a new se arch, select Options > New search . Delete e-mails Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete an e-mail messa ge, select the messag e and Options > Actions > Delete . The message is placed in the Deleted items folder, if avai lable. If there is no Deleted items folder available, the message is deleted permanently. To empty the Deleted items fo lder, select the folder and Options > Empty deleted it ems . Switch between e-mail folders Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To open another e-mail folder or mailbox, select Inbox at the top of the display. Select the e-mail folder or mailbox from the list. Disconnect from the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To cancel the synchronization between the device and the e-mail server, an d to work with e-mail withou t a wireless connection, select Options > Disconne ct . If your mailbox does not have the Disconnect option, sele ct Options > Exit to disconnect from the mailbox. To start the synchron ization again, select Options > Connect . Set an out-of-office reply Select Menu > Email . 43 Messaging
To set an out-of-office reply, if available, select your mailbox and Options > Settings > Mailbox > Out of office > On . To enter the text for the reply, select Out of offi ce reply . General e-mail settings Select Menu > Email and Settings > Global settings . Select from the following: ⢠Message list layout â Select whether the e-mail messages in Inbox display one or two lines of text. ⢠Body text preview â Preview messages when scrolling through the list of e -mail messages in Inbox. ⢠Title dividers â T o b e a b l e t o e x p a n d a n d c o l l a p s e t h e list of e-mail messages, select On . ⢠Download notifi cations â Set the device to display a notification when an e-mail a ttachment has been downloaded. ⢠Warn before delete â Set the device to display a warning before you delete an e-mail message. ⢠Home screen â Define how many lin es of e-mail are displayed in the home sc reen information area. Message reader With Message reader you can listen to te xt, multimedia, audio, and e-mai l messages. To listen to new message s or e-mail, in the home screen, press and hold the left sele ction key until Message reader opens . To listen to a message from your Inbox, scroll to the message, and sele ct Options > Listen . To listen to an e- mail message from your mail box, scroll to the message, and select Option s > List en . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the re ading, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message, scroll right. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left. To skip to the previous message, scroll left at the beginnin g of the message. To view the current message or e-mail in text format without the sound, select O ptions > View . Speech Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Speech . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message r eader, select Language . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . When you download a new language, you must download at least one voice fo r that language. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the s peaking rate, select Speed . To set the speakin g volume, select Volume . To view the details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voice . 44 Messaging
To delete languages or voices, select the item and Options > Delete . Text and multimedia messages Select Menu > Messaging . Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display mult imedia messages. T he appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. A multimedia message (MMS) ca n contain text and objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your device, you must define the multimedia mes sage settings. Your device may recognize the SIM card provider and configure the correct multimedia message settings automatically. If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings , order the settings from your servic e provider in a configuration message, or use the Settin gs wizard application. Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may contai n malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to res end it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend t he e-mail may increase your data tran sfer costs. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a messag e, or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Select New message > Mess age to send a text or multimedia message (MMS), Audio message to send a multimedia message that i ncludes one sound clip, or E-mail to send an e-mail message. 2. In the To field, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from the contacts list, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. You can also copy and paste the number or a ddress from the clipboard. 3. In the subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visi ble, select Optio ns > Message header fields . 4. In the message field, writ e the message. To insert a template or note, select Options > Insert content > Insert text > Template or Note . 5. To add a media file to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert content , the file type or sou rce, and the desired file. To in sert a business card, slide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Insert conte nt > Insert other . 6. To capture an image or record a video or sound clip for a multimedia me ssage, select Op tions > Insert 45 Messaging
content > Insert image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert sound clip > New . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Optio ns and the attachment type. E-mail att achments are indica ted by . 8. To send the message, se lect Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. Your device supports tex t messages be yond the limit for a single message . Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more spa ce, and limit the number of characters that can be se nt in a single me ssage. You may not be able to send video clips th at are saved in the MP4 file format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > SIM messages . T e x t m e s s a g e s m a y b e s t o r e d o n y o u r S I M c a r d . B e f o r e y o u can view SIM message s, you must copy the message s to a folder in the device. After copy ing the messages to a folder, you can view them in the fold er or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Sele ct Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Sele ct Opti ons > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM car d messages, open the folder where you copied the me ssages, and op en a message. Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Reply . 2. Sele ct To sende r to reply to the sender, To all to reply to everyone included in the received message, Via audio message to reply with an audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. E -mail message is available only if a mailbox is confi gured and the message is sent from an e-mail ad dress. 3. Enter the t ext of the mess age, and select Options > Send . Create presentations Select Menu > Messaging . 46 Messaging
Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if MMS creati on mode is set to Restricted . To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia m essage > MMS creation mode > Free or Guided . 1. To create a presentation, select New me ssage > Message . The message type is changed to multimedia message based on th e inserted content. 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from the contac ts list. If you enter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Option s > Insert co ntent > Insert presentation and a presentation template. A template may defin e which media obj ects you can include in the presentation , where they appear, and which effects are displa yed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area, an d enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound or video clips, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Options > In sert . 6. To add slides, select Options > Insert > New slide . To select the background color for the presentation and background images for different slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects betwe en im ages or slides, select Op tions > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Optio ns > Preview . Multimedia presentations may only be viewed in compatible devices tha t support presentations. They may appear different in different devices. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the presentation, select Opt ions > Continue . If the text or images are t oo large to fit on the display, select Option s > Activate scrolling , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone num bers and e-ma il or w eb addresses in the presentation, select Option s > Find . You ma y use these numbers and addresse s to make calls, send messag es, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia message s as complete presentations, open the message , and select Options > Play presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia messa ge, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play video clip . To view the name and size of an attachment, select the message and Op tions > Obj ects . To save a multimed ia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . 47 Messaging
Special message types Select Menu > Messaging . You can receive special messages th at contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account se ttings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications such as news hea dlines, services, or links throug h which the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message settings, select Opt ions > Settings > Service message . To download the service or message content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other details of the mes sage before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send servic e commands You can send a service reque st message (also kn own as a USSD command) to your serv ice provider and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service request message, select Op tions > Service commands . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast networ k service, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic cond itions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topi c numbers, contact your service provider. Cell br oadcast messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to turn cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related to a topic, select the t opic. To receive messages rela ted to a topic, select Opti ons > Subscribe . Tip: You can set import ant topics as h ot topics. You are notified in the home screen, when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic and Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Option s > Topic . 48 Messaging
Messaging settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs . Open the message type in qu estion, and define all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognize the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, and GPRS settings automa tically. If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centers â View the available message centers for your device, or add a new one. ⢠Message center in use â Select a message center to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Reduce d support to use automatic cha racter conversion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network service). ⢠Message validity â Select how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient cannot be reached within the validity period, the mes sage is deleted from the message center. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to an other format. Change this option on ly if you are sure that your message center is able to convert text messages into these other formats. For more information, contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your devic e. ⢠Reply via same center â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message center number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > Multimedia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Scale image s in multimedia messages. ⢠MMS creati on mode â Sele ct Restrict ed to set your device to prevent you from including content in multimedia messages tha t may not be supported by the network or the receiving de vice. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message wi th no restrictions on attachment type, select Fre e . If you select Restrict ed , creating multimedia pres entations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge center. You may not be able to change the default access p oint if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimedia retri eval â Select how you wa nt to receive messages, if available. Select Always automatic to receive multimedia messages always 49 Messaging
automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multim edia message that you can retrieve from the message center (for example, when you are traveling abroad and are outside y our home network), Manual to retrieve multi media messages from the message center manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimed ia messages. A utomatic retrieval may not be su pported in all regions. ⢠Allow anonymous ms gs. â Receive messages from unknown senders. ⢠Receive ads â Receiv e messages de fined as advertisements. ⢠Receive reports â R equest for delivery and read reports of sent message s (n etwork service). Receiving a delivery report of a mu ltimedia message that ha s been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to no t send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging center tries to send the me ssage (network service). If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging center. Maxi mum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. The device requires network support to indicat e that a sent message has been received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstan ces, this information may not always be reliable. Service message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Service mess age . To allow your device to receiv e service messages from your service provider, select Service mess ages > On . To select how to download services and service message content , select Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If you select Automatically , you may sti ll need to confirm some downloads since not a ll services can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Cell broadcast . To receive cell broadc ast messages, select Reception > On . To select the la nguages in which y ou want to receiv e cell broadcast message s, select Lang uage . To display new topics in the ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Other . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent messages â Selec t whether to save sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Number of saved msgs. â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. 50 Messaging
⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your m essages. You can save messages to th e memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder v iew â Select if you want to see folder information on one or two lines. About Chat With IM (network service) , you can exchange instan t messages wi th your friends. You can access sev eral chat services or communities simultaneously and s witch between them. If you want to , for example, browse the web, you can leave the I M application to run in the background, and still be notified of new instant messages. The IM application is preinsta lled on your device. To start chatting, select Menu > Applicatio ns > Chat . Using network services and downloadi ng content to you r device may result in data traffic costs. 51 Messaging
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GP RS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UM TS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data conn ection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a Wi-Fi/WLAN data connection. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use the s ame internet access point. To establish a data connect ion, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of access points, such as the following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network settings Your device can automatically swit ch between GSM and 3G networks. T he GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The 3G network is indicated with . Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Phone > Network and from the following: ⢠Network mode â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or 3G network automatically , according to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. For details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. A roaming agreem ent is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. ⢠Operato r selectio n â Select Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connect ion to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a ne tw ork. The selected network must have a r oaming agreement with your hom e cellular network. ⢠Cell info display â Set the device to indica te when it is used in a cellular netw ork based on microcellular 52 Connectivity
network (MCN) technology and t o activate cell info reception. Wi-Fi/WLAN connection Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WLA N, you can connec t your device to the int ernet and compatible dev ices that have WLAN suppo rt. About WLAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WLA N, you can connec t your device to the internet a nd compatible devices that support WLAN. To use a WLAN connection, you need the following: ⢠WLAN must be available in your location. ⢠Your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and yo u need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. ⢠An internet a ccess point created for WLA N. Use the access point for applications th at need to connect t o the internet. A WLAN conne ction is established when you create a data connection using a W LAN internet acces s point. Th e active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can us e WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but se veral applications can use the same internet access point. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to ru n in the background while using other feat ures, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g standard ⢠Operation at 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi protected access (WPA/WPA2), a nd 802.1x authentica tion methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to incr ease the security of your wireless LAN conne ction. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use a WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. Note: Using Wi-Fi may be restricted in some countries. For example, in Fr ance, you are only allowed to use Wi-Fi indoors. For more information, contact your loc al authorities. 53 Connectivity
WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you mu st create an internet access point (I AP) for WLAN. Use the access point for applications that n eed to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN inte rnet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can us e WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applicati ons can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offli ne profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN con nection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the ho me screen. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a wireless LAN (WLAN) and manage your WL AN connections. If the search finds WLANs, to creat e an internet access point (IAP) for a connection an d start the web browser using this IAP, select the connection and Start web browsing . If you select a secured WLAN , you are asked to enter the relevant password. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). If you already have the web browser runn ing using the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Cont. web browsing . To end th e active connection, select the connection and Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. and Options . Select from the following: ⢠Filter WLAN netwo rks â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networks. The selected networks a re not displayed t he next time th e application searches for WLANs. ⢠Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active connection, th e connection details are displayed. Operating modes There are two operating modes in Wi-Fi WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operat ing mode allows two kinds of communicat ion: wireless devic es are connected to each other through a Wi-F i/WLAN access point device, or wireless devices are connec te d to a wired LAN th rough a Wi-Fi/WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly with each other. 54 Connectivity
WLAN settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a wireless LAN (WLAN) availa ble in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for availa ble WLANs, and to update the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not av ailable unless you s elect Show WLAN availabi lity > Yes . To set the device to test the internet capability of t he selected WLAN automa tically, to ask for permission every time, or to never perform th e connectivity test, select Internet connectivity te st > Run automatically , Ask every time , or Never run . If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when th e device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to internet destinations. To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#6220952 6# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. Active data connections Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . Select Active data connections . In the active data connections view, you can see the open data connect ions: packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Option s > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . Sync Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Sync . Sync enables you to synchroniz e your notes, calendar entries, text and multim edia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronizat ion settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronization profile con tai ns the necessary settings for synchronization. When you open the Sync application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark t o leave it out. To manage sync profiles, select Options and the desired option. 55 Connectivity
To synchronize data, select Optio ns > Synchronize . To cancel synchronizati on befo re it finishes, select Cancel . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth connectivity With Bluetooth connect ivity , you can make a wireless connection to other compatib le devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets, and car kits. You can use the connection to send images, video and sound clips, and notes, tran sfer files from your com patible PC, and print im ages with a comp atible printer. Since devices with B luetooth wireless technology communicate usin g radio waves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. Howe ver, they mus t be within 10 meters (33 feet) of each ot her, although the conn ection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Advanced Aud io Distribution, Audio Video Remote Control, Basic Imaging, Basic Printing, Dial-u p Networking, File Transfer, Generic Access, Hands-free, Hea dset, Human Interface De vice, Object Push, Phone Book Access, SIM Access, Serial Port. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the ma nufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth technology increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, only connections to authorized devices are possible. Settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Blueto oth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can chan ge the name later. Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. ⢠My phone's visibility â To allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetoo th wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period after which th e visibility is set from shown to hidden , select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . ⢠My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wi reless technology. ⢠Remote SIM mod e â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit accessory, to use the SIM card in your device to conn ect to the network. Security tips Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Blueto oth . 56 Connectivity
When you are not using Bluetooth conn ectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidde n . Operating the device in hi dden mode is a safer way to avoid malicious software. Do not accept Bluetooth connectivity from sources you do not trust. Alternatively, switch off the Bluetooth func tion. This does not affect other functions of the device. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This protects your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connecti ons ca n be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the application where the item you want to send is store d. 2. Scroll to an item, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices using Bluet ooth technology w ithin range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt th e search, select Cancel . 3. Select the device wi th which you wa nt to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you a re asked to enter a passcode. The same passcode must b e entered in both devic es. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed . Pair devices To pair with compatible dev ices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1 to 16 digits) and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not ha ve a user interfa ce have a factory-set passcode . The pa sscode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices that are within range are displayed. 2. Select the device, and en ter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as w ell. 3. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancement, and s elect Opt ions > Connect to audio de vice . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as a uthorized or unauthorized, scroll to the device, and select from the following options: ⢠Set as authorized â Connections between your device and the au thorized de vice can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or 57 Connectivity
authorization is needed. Use this status for your ow n devices, such as your compat ible headset, PC or devices that belong to someone you trust. indica tes authorized devices in th e paired devices view. ⢠Set as unauthorized â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairin gs, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data through Bluetooth conn ectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you w ant to accept the message . If you accep t, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messag ing. Messa ges rece ived through Bluetooth connectivity a re indicated by . Tip: If your device notifies you that the memory i s full when you try to receive data th rough Bluetooth connectivity, change memo ry card as the memory where the data is stored. Block devices Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Blueto oth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Paired devic es tab. Scroll to a device you want to block, and select Opt ions > Block . To unblock a device, open the Blocked devices tab, scroll to a device, and select Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Dele te all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want t o block a ll future connec tion requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paire d and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode and set the other device as authorized. To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, activate Bluetooth con nectivity and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator ar ea, and you cannot use SI M card serv ices or features requiring cellular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conne cted enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode, ex cept to the emergency numbers programm ed into your device. To 58 Connectivity
make calls from your device , you must leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . Data cable To avoid corrupting data, do not disconnect the USB data cable during da ta transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card in your device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the data cable. 2. When the device asks which mode to use, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. End the connection from the computer (from the Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Microso ft Windows, for example) to avoid damag ing the memory card. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect the data cable, and select PC Suite . To synchronize the music in your device with Nokia Ovi Player, install the Nokia O vi Player software on your PC, connect the data cable, and select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you n ormally use with the dat a cable, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode , and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the data cable to the devi ce, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivi ty > USB and Ask on connection > Yes . PC connections You can use your mobile device with a variety of compatible PC connectiv ity and data communica tions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exampl e, transfer files and im ages between your device and a compatible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Suite . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and certified by the Di gital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). You can use a wireless L AN (WLAN) acce ss point device or router to create a home netw ork. Then you can connect compatible WLAN-ena bled UPnP devices to the network. Compatible devices may be your mobile device, a compatible PC, a sound system, a television, or a compatible wireless multimedi a receiver connected to a sound system or telev ision. You can share and synchron ize media files in your mobile device with other compatible UPnP and DLNA certified devices using the home ne twork. To activate the home network functionality and ma nage the settings, select 59 Connectivity
Menu > Applica tions > Home media . You can also use the Home media application to view and play media files from home network devices on your device or on other compatible devices su ch as a PC, sound syste m, or television. To view your media files on anoth er home network device, in Photos, for exampl e, select a file, Options > Show vi a home netw ork , and the device. To use the WLAN function of your device in a home network, you must have a working W LAN home connection and have other UPnP enabled home devices connected to the same home network. After setting up your home network, you can shar e your photos and video clips with your friends and family at home. You ar e also able to store y our media to a media server or retrieve media files from a compatible home server. You can play music stored in your device using a DLNA certified home stereo system, controlling the playlists and volume levels di r ectly from your device. You can also view images captur ed with the camera of your device on a compatible TV sc reen, all controlled with your devic e over WLAN . The home network uses the security setti ngs of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feature in a WLAN infrastructure network with a WLAN access point dev ice and encryption enabled. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection reques t from another compatible device, or select the option to vie w or play, or copy media files on your device, or search for other devices. 60 Connectivity
Internet With the web browser, you can view web pages on the internet. You can also browse web pages tha t are designed specifically for cellular phones. To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Using the web browser requires network support. Browse the web With the Brow ser application , you can browse web pages. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Shortcut: To o pe n B r o w se r , p r es s a n d ho l d 0 in the home screen. Go to a web p age â In the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or start entering a web address (the field opens automatically), and select Go to . Some web pages may contai n material, such as videos , that requires a larg e amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory whi le loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Othe rwise, the videos are not displayed. Disable graphics to save memory and speed up downloadin g â Select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . Refresh the co ntent of the web page â Select Options > Web page options > Reload . View snapshots of web page s you have visited â Select Back . A list of pages y ou have visited during th e current brow sing session opens. This option is available if History list is activated in the browser se ttings. Block or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows â Select Options > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . View the sho rtcut keys â Select Options > Keypad shortcuts . To edit the shortcut keys, select Edit . Zoom into or out of the web p age. â Press * or # . Tip: To go to the home screen without exiting the Browser application or closing the connection, press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. Open the t oolbar â Press and hold the scroll key on a blank area of a web pag e. Move within the toolbar â Scroll left or right. Select a feature from the t oolbar â Press t he scroll key From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: ⢠Go to web address â Enter a web address. ⢠Recently visited page s â View a list of the web addresses you visit frequently. 61 Internet
⢠Bookmarks â Open the bookmarks view. ⢠Full screen â View the web page in full screen. ⢠Page overvi ew â Display an overview of the current web page. ⢠Search by keyword â Search the current web page. ⢠Settings â Edit the web browser settings. Navigate pages When you are browsing a large web page, you can use Mini Map or Page overview to vi ew the page at one glance. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Activate the Mini Map â Selec t Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . When you scroll thr ough a large web page, the Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the page. Move on the Mini Map â Scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired locat ion, stop scrolling. The Mi ni Map disappears and leaves yo u at the selected location. Find information on a web page with Page overview 1. Press 8 . A miniature image of the current web page opens. 2. Move on the miniature im age by scrolling up, down, left, or right. 3. When you find a se ction you want to view, select OK to go to that section on the web page. Web feeds and blogs With web feeds, you can easi ly follow news headlines and your favorite blogs. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages. They are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages . The browser application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. Subscribe to a web feed when a feed is available on the page â Select Options > Subscribe to web feeds . Update a web feed â In the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > W eb feed opti ons > Refres h . Set automatic upda te for all web fe eds â In the Web feeds view, select Options > Edit > Edit . This option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Content search With keyword search, you can quickly find the information you are looking for on a web page. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Search for text within the current w eb page â Select Options > Find keyword . To view the previous or next month, s croll up or down. Tip: To search for text within the current web p age, press 2 . 62 Internet
Bookmarks You can store your favorite web pages in Bookmarks for instant access . Select Menu > Internet > Web . Access bookmarks 1. If you have a page othe r than Bookmarks as y our homepage, select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . 2. Select a web address from the list or from the collection of bookmarks in the Recent ly visited pages folder. Save the current web page as a bookmark â While browsing, select Optio ns > Web page options > Save as bookmark . Edit or delete boo kmarks â S elect Op tions > Bookmark manager . Send or add a bookm ark, or set a b ookmarked web page as the homepage â Select Options > Bookmark options . Empty the cache Emptying the cache memory helps you keep your data secure. The information or se rvices you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. If you have accessed or tried to acce ss confidential information requir ing pas sword s, emp ty th e cache after each browsing session. Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the connection End the connection and close the Browser application â Selec t Option s > Exit . Delete cookies â Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Cookies contain information collected about your vi sits to web pages . Connection security With a secure connection and security certificates, you can safely browse the internet. If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the da ta transmission between the ga teway and the cont ent server (where the data is stored) is s ecure. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and so ftware installation consid erably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by 63 Internet
itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certific ates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "C ertificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. Web settings Select Menu > Internet > Web and Options > Settings and from the following: General settings ⢠Access point â C h a n g e t h e d e f a ult access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider. You may not be able to change, create, edit , or remo ve them. ⢠Homepage â Define the homepage. ⢠Mini map â Turn Mini Map on or off. Mini Map helps with web page navigation. ⢠History list â If y ou se l ec t On , while br owsing, to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current session, select Back . ⢠Web address suff ix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (f or example, .com or .org). ⢠Securi ty warn ings â Hide or show securi ty notification s. ⢠Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. ⢠Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifi cations. Page settings ⢠Load content â Select whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only , to load ima ges or objects later during browsing, select Opti ons > Display options > Load images . ⢠Default encoding â If text characters ar e not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language for the current page. ⢠Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. ⢠Automati c relo ad â Select whether y ou want the web pages to be refreshed a utomatically wh ile browsing. ⢠Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings ⢠Recently visited p ages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you wa nt to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pag es into the Recently visited pages folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, se lect H ide folder . ⢠Form data savi ng â Select whether you wa nt the password data or data you enter on different forms on a web page to be save d an d used the next time you open the page. ⢠Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings 64 Internet
⢠Acc. point for auto-update â Select the desired access point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automati c update s is active. ⢠Update wh en roaming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically when roamin g. 65 Internet
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools support wireless busines s and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit and view different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes or shopping lists. You can in s ert images, videos and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applica tions, such as Contacts , and send notes to ot hers. Create and edit notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, select the note and Options > Editing options . To add boldface, italics, or underli ning to your text or change the font color, press and hold the Shi ft key, and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, we b bookmarks, and files. ⢠Insert new â Add new items to the note. You can record sound and video cl ips, and capture images. ⢠Send â Send the note. ⢠Link note to call â S e l e c t Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The note is displayed wh en making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Menu > Office > Acti ve notes and Op tions > Settings . To select where to save notes , select Memory in use and the desired memory. To change the layout of active notes, or to view the notes as a list, select Change view > Grid or List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Ye s . Tip: If you temporarily do no t want to see notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have to rem ove the links between notes and contact cards. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en ter the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the 66 Nokia Office Tools
calculation and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the edit or field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the Calculator ap plication or switching off the device does not clear the memory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a c alculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager About File manager Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files. The available options may vary. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a compatible remote driv e connected to your device , select Options > Remote driv es . Find and organize files Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Option s > Find . Select where to search, and enter a search te rm that matches the file name. To move or copy files and folders, o r to create new folders, select Options > Organize . Manage a memory card Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. ⢠Memory card password â P assword protect a memory card. ⢠Unlock memory card â Unlock a memory card. Quickoffice About Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quic kword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentation s, and Quic kmanager for p urchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 200 3, and 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, and PPT file formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the ed itor version of Quickoffice , you can also edit files. 67 Nokia Office Tools
Not all file formats or features are supported. Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements Select Menu > Office > Converter . 1. Scroll to the type field, and select Options > Conversion t ype t o o p e n a l i s t o f m e a s u r e s . S e l e c t t h e measurement type to use (other th an currency) and OK . 2. Scroll to the first unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which to convert and OK . Scroll to the next unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other amount field changes automatica lly to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate Select Menu > Office > Converter . When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all pr eviously set excha nge rates are cleared. Before you can make currency co nversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is al ways 1. The base cur rency determines the conversion ra tes of the other currencies. 1. To set the exchange rate for th e unit of currency, scroll to the type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type, an d enter the exchan ge rate you would like to set per single unit of currency . 3. To change the base curr ency , scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Sele ct Done > Yes to save the changes. After you have set all the ne cessary exchange rate s, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted files; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive pa ssword for protected archives; and change settings, such as co mpression level and file name encoding. You can save the archive files in t he device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . 68 Nokia Office Tools
With PDF reader, you can re ad PDF documents on th e display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Printing You can pr int documents, such as files, mess ages, images, or web pages, from your device. You may not be able t o print all types of docu ments. File printing Print files Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . Before printing, ensure that all the necessary configurations have been done to connect your device to the printer. Select Options > Printing options and from the following: ⢠Print â Print a document. To pri nt to a file, select Pri nt to file , and define the location for the file. ⢠Page set up â You can change the paper size and orientation, define the margin s, and insert a header or a footer. The maximum length of the header and footer is 128 characters. ⢠Preview â Preview the document before printing. Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing options > Print . Define the follo wing options: ⢠Printer â Select an availabl e printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of cop ies â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to fi le â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. The available options may vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . To add a new printer, select Options > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the access point. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define th e host. ⢠User â En ter the user. ⢠Queue â En ter the print queue. ⢠Orient ation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media ty pe. ⢠Color mode â Select the color mode. ⢠Printer mo del â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. 69 Nokia Office Tools
Image print You can print images from your device using a printer compatible with Pict Bridge. Yo u can only prin t images that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, camera, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Option s > Print . Connect to printer Connect your device to a compatible printe r with a compatible data cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. To set your device to ask the purpose of th e connection each time the cable is connected, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Connectivity > USB > Ask on conne ction > Yes . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. If the images do not fit on a single pag e, scroll up or down to display the additional p ages. Image print view After you select the images to print a nd the printer, define the printer settings. Select from the following: ⢠Layout â Select the layo ut for the images. ⢠Paper s ize â Select the paper size. ⢠Print quality â Select the print quality. Dictionary Select Menu > Office > Dictionary . To translate wo rds from one language to another, ent er text in the search field. As you en ter text, suggestions of words to translate are displayed. To transla te a word, select the word from the li st. All languages may not be supported. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Listen â Listen to the selected word. ⢠History â Find previously trans lated words from the current session. ⢠Langua ges â Change the source or target language, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dictionary. You cannot remove the English langua ge from the dictionary. You can have two additional langua ges inst alled, besides English. ⢠Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust the speed and volume of the voice. Notes Select Menu > Office > Note s . You can create and send notes to ot her compatible devices, and save received plai n text files (TXT file format) to Notes. To write a note, start entering the text. The note editor opens automa tically. To open a note, sele ct Open . 70 Nokia Office Tools
To send a note to other compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronize or to define synchronization settings for a note, select Options > Synchronization . Select Start to initialize synchronization or Se ttings to define the synchronization settings for the note. 71 Nokia Office Tools
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such a s GPS data to determine your location, or measure dista nces and coordinates. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordin ate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Sta tes government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Different positioning methods can be enabled or disabled in positioning settings. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports as sisted GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS requires network support. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection , which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informati on from an assista nce data serv er over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assist ance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Options > Positioni ng settings > Positioning me thods > Assisted G PS > Options > Disable . You must have an internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The access point for A-GPS can be defined in posi tioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. 72 Positioning (GPS)
Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select th e internet access point when GPS is used for the first time. Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your han d. Establishing a GPS conne ction may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using th e GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device ca nnot find the sate llite signal, con sider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover th e GPS antenna of you r devic e. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, th e signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted (at hermic) windows, which may block the satellite signa ls. Check satellite signal status To check how many sate llites your device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, select Menu > Applicatio ns > GPS data an d Options > Satellite stat us . If your device has found satellites, a bar for ea ch satellite is displayed in the satellite information view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal is. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal t o calculate the coordinates of your locati on, the bar color changes. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at leas t four satellites to be able to ca lculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial ca lculati on has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with th ree satellites. However, t he accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weat her or traffic conditions, based on th e location of your device. 73 Positioning (GPS)
When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reje ct to deny the reques t. Landmarks With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business , and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved lan dmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data. Select Menu > Applicatio ns > Landmarks . The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠New landmark â Create a ne w landmark . To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current posit ion . To select the location from the map, select Select from ma p . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . ⢠Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). ⢠Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each ca te gory to wh ich you want to add the landmark. ⢠Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, open the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categories . GPS data Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > GPS data an d Naviga tion . Start the route guidance outdoors. If started indoors, th e GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approximate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring . Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstac les on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacle s, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not ta ken into account when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destination, select Option s > Set destinatio n and a landmark as th e destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination se t for your trip, select Stop navigati on . Trip meter Select Menu > Applications > GPS data an d Trip distance . 74 Positioning (GPS)
The trip meter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS s ignals. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS s ignal. To set the trip distance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation, select Options > Reset . To set the trip meter and total time to zero, select Restart . Positioning settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral > Positioning . Positioning methods Select from the following: ⢠Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. ⢠Assisted G PS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from an assista nce data server. ⢠Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluet ooth connectivity. ⢠Networ k based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point and positioning server for network-assisted positioning methods, such as assis ted GPS or network-based positioning, select Po sitionin g server . The positio ning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Notation settings To select wh ich measur ement system you want t o use for speeds and distan ces, select Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Coordinate format and the desired format. 75 Positioning (GPS)
Maps Maps overview Select Menu > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you what is nearby, helps you plan your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, streets, and services. ⢠Find your way with turn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronize your favorite loca tions and routes between your cellular phone and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather forecasts and other local information, if available. Note: Downloading content such as maps, s atellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of la rge amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be available in all countries, and may be provided only in sele cted languages. The services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as sate llite images, guides, weather and traffic information and rela ted services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be inaccurate and incom plete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely s olely on the aforementioned content and related services. My position View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and br owse maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Maps and My posit ion . When the GPS connection is active, marks your current or last known location on the ma p. If the ic on' s c ol ors ar e faint, no GPS sign al is available. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon in dicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated areas. Move on the map â Use the scroll key. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location â Press 0 . Zoom in or o ut. â Press * or # . 76 Maps
If you browse to an area no t covered by maps that are stored on your device and you have an active data connection, new maps are automatica lly downloaded. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 â Selected location 2 â In dicato r area 3 â Point of interest (for ex ample, a railway station or a museum) 4 â Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different mode s, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Maps and My posit ion . Press 1 , and select from the following: ⢠Map â In the standard ma p view, details such as location names or highway nu mbers, are easy to read. ⢠Satellite â For a detailed view, use satellite images. ⢠Terrain â View at a glance the ground type, for example, when you ar e traveling off-road. Change between 2D and 3D views â Press 3 . Download and update maps To avoid cellular data transfe r costs, download the latest maps and voice guidance file s to your computer, and then transfer and sa ve them to your device. Use the Nokia Ovi Suite applic ation to download the latest maps and voice guidance files to your compatible computer. To download and install Nokia Ovi Suite on your compatible computer, go to www.ovi.com. Tip: Save new maps to your device before a journey, so you can browse the maps without an internet connection when trav eling abroad. To make sure your device does not use an internet connection, in the main menu, select Options > Settings > Internet > Connection > Offline . Use the compass If your device has a compass, when activated, both the arrow of the compass and the map rotate automatically in the direction to which the top of your device is pointing. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Activate the co mpass â Press 5 . 77 Maps
Deactivate the compass â Press 5 again. The ma p is oriented north. The compass is active when ther e is a green outline. If the compass needs calibration, the outline of the compass is red or yello w. To calibr ate the compass , rotate th e device around all axes in a continuou s movement. The compass has limited accuracy. Electromagnetic fields, metal objects, or other external circumstances may also affect the accuracy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. About positioning methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-ba sed navigation system used for calculating your location. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is a network service that improves t he speed and accuracy of the positioning. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define an internet ac cess point to download map information or use A-GPS. indicates the availability of the sa tellite signals. One bar is one satellite. When the device is searching for satellite signals, th e bar is yellow. When there is enough data available to calculate y our location, the bar turns green. The mo re green bars, the more reliable the location calculation. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by th e United States government and is subject to ch ange with the United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather condit ions. GPS signals may not be available inside b uildings or underground and may be impaired by materi als such as concrete and meta l. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely sole ly on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited a c curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS s ignals. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your cellular phone is currently connected to. Depending on the availa ble positioning method, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few meters to several kilometers. Find places Find a location Maps helps you find specific locations and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > Maps and Find places . 1. Enter search terms, such as a street address or postcode. To clear the search field, select Clear . 78 Maps
2. Select Go . 3. In the list of proposed matches, go to the desired item. To display the location on the map, select Map . To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, scroll up and down with the scroll key. Return to the list of propos ed matches â Selec t List . Search for different types of nearby places â Select Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or tran sport. If no search result s are found, ensure the spelling of your search terms is correct . Problems with your internet connection may also affect resu lts when searching online . To avoid data trans fer costs, you can a lso get search results without an active int ernet connection, if you ha ve maps of the searched area stored on your device. View location details View more information about a specific location or plac e, such as a hotel or r estaurant, if av ailable. Select Menu > Maps and My posit ion . View the detail s of a place â Select a place, press the scroll key, and select Show details . Manage places and routes Save places and routes Save addresses, places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Maps . Save a place 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. Press the scroll key. 4. Select Save place . Save a route 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. To add another route point, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 4. Select Add new route point and the appropriate option. 5. Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your save d places and routes â Select Favorites > Places or Routes . 79 Maps
View and organize places or routes Use your Favorites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes into a co llection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Maps and Favorites . View a saved place on the map 1. Sele ct Plac es . 2. Go to the place. 3. Sele ct Show on map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collection â Select Create new collection , and enter a collection name. Add a saved place to a collection 1. Sele ct Plac es and the place. 2. Sele ct Organize collections . 3. Sele ct New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete places or routes, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your friends When you want to share pl ace information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > Maps and My position Send a place to your fr iend's compatible d evice â Select a location, press the scroll key, and select Send . Synchronize your Favorites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronize the saved places, routes, and collections with your cellular phone, and access the plan on the go. To synchronize places, routes, or collections between your cellular phone and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. If you do not have one, in the main view, select Options > Account > Nokia account > Create new account . Synchronize saved place s, routes, and collections â Select Favorites > Synchronize with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia ac count, you are prompted to create one. You can set your device to synchronize you r Favorites automatically when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronize Favori tes automatically â Select Options > Settings > Synchronization > Change > At start-up and shut-d. . Synchronizing requires an acti ve internet connection, and may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. 80 Maps
Share location Publish your current location to Facebook, together w ith text and a picture. Your Fa cebook friends can see y our location on a map. Select Menu > Maps and Share location . To share your location , you need a Nokia account and a Facebook account. 1. Sign in to your Nokia account, or, if you do not yet have one, select Create new account . 2. Sign in to your Facebook account. 3. Select your current location. 4. Enter your status upda te. 5. To attach a pict ure to your post, select Add a photo . 6. Select Share location . Manage your Facebook a ccount â In the main view, select Options > Accou nt > Share location sett ings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of large amou nts of data and related data traffic costs. The Facebook terms of use ap ply to sharing your location on Facebook. Familiarize your self with the Facebook terms of use and the privacy practices. Before sharing your location to others, always consider carefully with whom you are sharing it. Check the privacy settings of the social networkin g service you are using as you might share your locati on with a large group of people. Drive and Walk Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available for your language, helps you find your way to a destination , leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk na vigation for th e first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance, and download the appro priate files. If you select a la nguage that inc ludes street names, also the street names are said al oud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice guidance language â In the main view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigati on > Drive guidanc e or Walk guidance and the appropriate option. Repeat the voice guidan ce for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Options > Repeat . Adjust the vo lume of the vo ice guidance for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Options > Volume . Drive to your destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you g et to your destinat ion. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination â Select Set destination and the appropriate option. 81 Maps
Drive to your h ome â Sel ect Drive home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define you r home location. To later change the home lo cation, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Home Location > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the center of the map as you move. Change views during navigation â Press the scroll key, and select 2D vi ew , 3D view , Arrow view , or Rout e overview . Obey all local laws. Always k eep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. Navigation view 1 â Route 2 â Your location and direction 3 â Compass 4 â Information bar (s peed, distance, time) Get traffic and safety information Enhance yo ur driving experience wi th real-time information about t raffic events, lane assist ance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . 82 Maps
View traffic ev ents on the map â During drive navigation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic informat ion â Select Optio ns > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid traffic events, such as tr affic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Reroute due to traffic . The location of speed came ras may be shown on your route during navigation, if th is feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not re sponsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using sp eed camera location data. Walk to your destination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centers. Select Menu > Maps and Walk . Walk to a destination â Select Set destinat ion and the appropriate opti on. Walk to your home â Select Walk home . When yo u select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the h ome lo cation, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Sett ings > Navigation > Home Lo cation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the center of the map as you move. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create your route and view it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Create a rout e 1. Go to your st arting point. 2. Press the scroll key, a nd select Add to ro ute . 3. To add another route point, select Add new rout e point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route poi nts 1. Go to a route point. 2. Press the scroll key, a nd select Move . 3. Go to the place where yo u want to m ove the route point to, and select OK . Edit the lo cation of a rout e point â Go to the route point, press the scroll key, and select Edit and the appropriate option. View the rou te on the map â Select Show route . Navigate to the destination â Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Start walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the na vigation guidance and th e way the route is displayed on the map. 83 Maps
1. In the route planner view, op en the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route pts. or Route point list . 2. Set the transportation mode to Drive or Walk . If yo u select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and pathway s an d routes th rough, for example, parks and shopping centers, can be used. 3. Select the desired option. Select the walking mode â Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indicates the walking direction. Use the faster or shor ter driving route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opt imized drivin g route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route sele ction > Optimized . The optimized driving route combines the advantages of both the shorter and the faster routes. You can also choose to allow or avoid using, for example, highways, toll roads, or ferries. Maps shortcuts General shortcuts To zoom in or out on the map, press * or # . To return to your cu rrent location, press 0 . To change the map type, press 1 . To tilt the map, press 2 or 8 . To rotate the map, press 4 or 6 . To return the map back to the north up posi tion, press 5 . Pedestrian navigation shortc uts To save a location, pres s 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To adjust the volume of the pedestrian navigation guidance, press 6 . To view the list of route points, press 7 . To adjust the map for night-tim e usage, press 8 . To view the dashboard, pr ess 9 . Car navigation shortcuts To adjust the map for daytime or ni ght-time usage, press 1 . To save the current location, press 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To repeat the voice guidance, press 4 . To find a different route, press 5 . To adjust the volume of voice guidance, press 6 . To add a stopover to the route, press 7 . To view traffic information, press 8 . To view the dashboard, pr ess 9 . 84 Maps
Personalization You can personalize your device by, for example, adjusting the various tones, background images, and screen savers. Profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . You can adjust and customiz e the ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. The active profile is shown at the top of the display in the home screen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , and define the settings. To customize a profile, select a profile and Options > Customize . To activate a profile, select a profi le and Options > Activate . To set the profile to be active until a certain t ime within the next 24 hou rs, scroll to the profile, select Options > Timed , and set the time. When the time expires, th e profile changes back to the previous ly active non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . Y ou cannot delete the predefined profiles. When the Offline profile is ac tivated, your connection to the cellular network is closed . All radio frequency signals between the device and the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send a message, it is placed in th e Outbox folder, and is sent only when another profile is activated. You can also use your device withou t a SIM card. If you remove the SIM card, the O ffline profile is activated. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. To make calls, you must firs t activate the phone function by changing profiles . If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you use the Offline profil e, you can still use a Wi-Fi network, for example, to read your mail or browse the internet. Yo u can also use Blu etooth connectivity . Remember to comply with any applica ble safety requirements when you es tablish and use Wi-Fi or Bluetooth connections. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Customize > Ringing tone . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a boo kmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading 85 Personalization
tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group only, select Options > Customize > Alert fo r , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. To change the message tone, select Options > Customize > Message alert tone . Customize profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . Select Optio ns > Customize and from the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringing tone tha t is a combination of the spoken name of the contac t and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you want the ringing ton e to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Selec t a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or message. ⢠Keypad tones â Select the volume level of the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Deactivat e the warning tones. This setting also affects th e tones of some ga mes and Java⢠applicati ons. ⢠Alert for â S et th e de vi ce t o r i ng o nl y u po n ca l ls fr o m phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠PTT call a lert tone â Select a ringing tone for PTT calls. ⢠Push to talk status â Set the PTT status to each profile. ⢠Profile na me â You can g ive a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The Normal and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Customize the home screen Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Modes . To change the name of the current home screen, select Options > Rename mode . To select which applications a nd notifications you wa nt to see in the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of th e ho me screen currently in use, select General theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . 86 Personalization
To change from one home screen to another, scroll to Current mod e , and select Options > Change . Change the display theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . Select from the following: ⢠Gener al â Change the theme used in all app lications. ⢠Menu view â Change the theme used in the main menu. ⢠Standby â Change the theme used in the home screen. ⢠Wallpaper â Change the background image of the home screen. ⢠Power save r â Select an animation for the power saver. ⢠Call image â Change t he image displayed during calls. To activate or deactivate the theme effects, select General > Options > Theme eff ects . Download a theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . To download a theme, select General > Download themes > Options > Go to > N ew web page . Enter the Web address from which you wa nt to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview or activate the theme. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To activate a theme, s elect Opt ions > Set . Change audio themes Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes and Audio themes . You can set sounds for variou s device events. The sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both. To change the current audio theme, select Active audio theme . To set a sound for an event, se lect an event group, such as ringing tones, and the desired event. To use all the preset sounds in an event group, select the group and Optio ns > Acti vate sounds . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Play voi ce â Play the sound before activati ng it. ⢠Save theme â Create a new audio theme. ⢠3-D ringing tones â Add 3-D effects to the audio theme. ⢠Speech â Se lect Sp eech to set speech as the sound for an event. En ter the desired tex t to the text fi eld. The Speech option is not a vailable if you hav e activated the Say caller's name option in the current profile. ⢠Deactivate sou nds â Silence all the sounds in an event group. 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > 3-D tones . 87 Personalization
To enable three-dimensional (3-D) sound effects for ringing tones, sele ct 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones support 3âÂÂD effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory speed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to an other. This setting is not available for all effects. ⢠Reverberation â Select the desired effect to adjust the amount of echo. To listen to the ringing tone with th e 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the v olume of the ringin g tone, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Prof iles and Options > Cu stomize > Ringing volume . 88 Personalization
Media Your device contains a variety of m edia applications for both business and leisure time use. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Select Menu > Media > Camera . Your device supp orts an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels. The image reso lution in this guide may appear different. 1. Use the display as a viewfinder. 2. To zoom in or out before capturing an image, scroll up or down. 3. If the Optical N avi key is activated, t o autofocus, hold your finger on the scroll key. To capture the image, press the scroll key. If the Optical Navi key is deactiv ated, to autofocus, press and hold the scroll key. To capture the image, release the scroll key. The device saves the image in Gallery. See "Optical Navi key," p. 25 . The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and af ter capturing an image or recording a video. Select from the following: Switch to image mode. Switch to video mode. Select the scene. Switch to panorama mode. Switch the video light on or off (video mode only) Switch the video light on or off (video mode only) Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer ( images only). Activate sequence mode (images only). Select a color tone. Adjust the white balance. The available options vary depending on the mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default values when you close the camera. To customize the camera tool bar, switch to image mode, and select Options > Customize to olbar . Scenes Select Menu > Media > Camera . 89 Media
A scene helps you to find the right color and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene modes in t he toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined, and select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based o n scene mod e and the desired scene. To activate y our own scene, select User def ined > Select . Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Media > Camera . To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Seque nce mode in the toolbar and press the scroll key. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time interval, only the last image is shown on the display, and the other images are available in Ga llery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To send the image to a caller during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . To turn off sequence mode, select Se quence mode > Single shot in the toolbar. View captured image Select Menu > Media > Camera . The image you captu red is automatically saved in Gallery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the i mage to compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the image to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the image to yo ur compatible on line album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image t o a contact, select Options > Assign to contact . Record videos Select Menu > Media > Camera . 1. If the camera is in image mode, select video mode from the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the scroll key. 3. To pause recording, select Pause . S elect Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in Ga llery. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. 90 Media
Play a video Select Menu > Media > Camera . To play a recorded video, select Play from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video to other compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the video to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the video to an online album (network service). ⢠Delet e â Delete the video. To enter a new name for the video, select Options > Rename vide o clip . Image setting s Select Menu > Media > Camera . To modify still image settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Image quality â Set the image quality. The better the image quality, the more me mory the image consumes. ⢠Add to album â Define to which al bum the captured images are saved. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image after the capture, select Yes . To continue capturing images immediately, select Off . ⢠Defaul t image nam e â Define the default name for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital zoo m â The On (continuous) option allows the zoom in crements to be smooth and continuous between the digi tal and exten ded digital zoom. The Off option allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â Set the tone that s ounds when you capture an image. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to store your images. ⢠Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. Video settings Select Menu > Media > Camera . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with OCIF resolution, in the 3GPP fi le format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 2 0 seconds). You may not be able to send video cl ips saved in the MP EG-4 file format in a mult imedia message. ⢠Audio recording â S el ec t Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Add to album â Define to whi ch album the recorded videos are saved. ⢠Show captured video â View the first frame of the recorded video after the recording stops. To view the entire video, select Play from the toolbar. ⢠Default video name â D efine the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to store your videos. ⢠Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. 91 Media
Gallery About Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Gallery is a storage p lace for your images, video an d sound clips, song s, and streaming link s. Main view Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Select from the following: ⢠Images â View images and video clips in Photos. ⢠Video clips â View video clips in Video center. ⢠Songs â Open Music player. ⢠Sound clips â Listen to sound clips. ⢠Streaming links â View and open streaming links. ⢠Presentati ons â View presentations. You can browse and open folders and copy and move items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. Files stored on your compatible memory card (if insert ed) are indicated with . To open a file, select the file from the list. Video clips and streaming links open and play in Video center, and music and sound clips in Music player. To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and the appro priate option. Sound clips Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Sound clips . This folder contains all the sound clips you have downloaded from the web. The sound clips created with the Recorder application w ith MMS-optimized or norm al quality settings are also saved in this folder, but the sound clips created with high qua lity settings are stored in the Music player application. To listen to a sound file, select the file from the list. To rewind or fast-forward, scroll left or right. To download sounds, se lect Downld. sounds . Streaming links Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Streamin g links . To open a streaming link, select the link from the list. To add a new streaming link, select Options > New link . Presentations Select Menu > Media > Gallery . With presentations, you can view scalable vector graphics (SVG) and flash files (SWF), su ch as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their ap pearance when printed or viewed with different scr een sizes and resolutions. To view files, select Present ations. Go to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . 92 Media
To zoom in, pr ess 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen mode, press * . Photos About Photos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and from the following: ⢠Captured â View all the images and videos you have captured. ⢠Months â View images and vi deos categorized by the month they where captured. ⢠Albums â View th e default albums and the on es you have created. ⢠Tags â View the tags you ha ve created for each item. ⢠Downl oads â View items and videos downloaded from the web or received as a multimedia or e-mail message. ⢠All â View all items. ⢠Share online â P o s t y o u r i m a g e s o r v i d e o s t o t h e w e b . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and from the available options. View imag es and video s Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images an d from the following: ⢠All â View all images and videos . ⢠Captured â View images captured and video clips recorded with the camera of your device. ⢠Downloads â View downloaded videos. Images and videos can also be sent to y ou from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video in Photos, you must fi rst save it. The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displ ayed. To brows e the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To open a file, select the fi le. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, use the zoom keys. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently . To edit an image or a video, select Opti ons > Edit . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > To printer o r kiosk . To move images to an albu m for later printing, select Options > Add to album > Print later . 93 Media
View and edit file details Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . Go to an item. To view and edit image or video properties, select Options > Details > View and edit and from the following: ⢠Tags â View the currently used tags. To add more tags to the current file, select Add . ⢠Description â View a free-form descr iption of the file. To add a description, select the field. ⢠Title â View the thumbnail ima ge of the file and the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. ⢠Albums â View in which albums the current file is located. ⢠Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. ⢠Duration â View the length of the video. ⢠Usage rig hts â To view the DRM rights of the current file, select View . Organize images and videos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . You can organize files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . To delete an image or vide o clip, select the item and Delete from the active toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the active toolbar, go to different items, and select the desired option. The availabl e options vary depending on the view you are in and wh ether you have s elected an image or a video clip. To hide the toolbar, select Optio ns > Hide toolbar . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: View the image in la ndscape or portrait mode. Play the video clip. Send the image or video clip. Upload the image or video clip to a compatible online album (only available i f you have set up an account for a compatible online album). Add the item to an album. Manage tags and other properties of the item. Albums Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s and Albums . With albums , you can co nveniently man age your images and video clips. 94 Media
To create a new album , select Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Optio ns > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the albu m to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and the item, and Options > Remov e from album . Tags Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Use tags to categorize media i tems in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the currently used tags a nd the number of ite ms associated with each tag. To open Tag mana ger, select an image or video clip and Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New tag . To assign a tag to an im age, select the image and Options > Add tags . To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images associated with a tag, select the tag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Option s > Alphabetical . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Most used . To remove an image from a tag, select the ta g and the image, and select Options > Remove f rom tag . Slide show Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . To v ie w y ou r im ag es a s a sl ide show, select an im age and Options > Slide sh ow > Play forwards or Play backwards . The slide show starts from the se lected file. To view only the selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images. To start the slide show, sele ct Option s > Slide show > Play forwards or Play b ackwards . To resume a pause d slide show, select Continue . To end the slide show, select End . To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting t he slide show, t o adjust the slide show settings, select Option s > Slide show > Settings an d from the following: ⢠Music â Add soun d to the slide show. ⢠Song â Select a music file from the list. ⢠Delay between slides â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. ⢠Transition â Make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and zoom in and out in the images randomly. To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume key . 95 Media
Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures after taking them or the ones already saved in Photos, select Options > Ed it . The image editor opens . To open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons, select Options > Apply effect . You can crop and rotate the im age; adjust the brightness , color, contrast and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop , and a predefined aspect ra tio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scro ll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corne r. Agai n se lect the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area , select Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped imag e. If you selec t a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cr op ped. To resi ze the highlig hted area, use the scroll key. To fr eeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reducti on . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the displa y. To resize the loop to fit t he size of the eye, use the scroll key. T o reduce the redness, press the scroll key. When yo u have finished editing the image, press Done . To save the chang es and return to the previous view, press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the following shor tcuts w hen editing images: ⢠To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left or right. Edit videos The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variation s of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edit , and from the following: ⢠Merge â to add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip ⢠Change sound â to add a new soun d clip, and to replace the original sound in the video clip. ⢠Add text â to add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip 96 Media
⢠Cut â to trim the video and m ark the section s you want to keep in the video clip To take a snapshot of a video clip, in the cut video view, select Options > T ake snapshot . In the thum bnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . Print images Image print To print ima ges with Image pr int, select the ima ge you want to print, and the print option in Photos, camera, image editor or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivi ty. You can als o print images using wireless LAN.If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can st ore the images to the memory card and print them using a comp atible printer. You can only p rint images th at are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the came ra are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, s elect the image and the print option. When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed . Select a printer. The printer is set as the default prin ter. To use a printer compatible with PictBridge, connect the compatible data cable before y ou select the print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . The printer is automatically displayed when you sele ct the print option. If the default printer is not avai lable, a list of available printers is displayed. To change the default prin ter, select Optio ns > Settings > Default printe r . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary de pending on the capabilities of the printing de vice you selected. To set a default pr inter, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Share online About Share onlin e Select Menu > Media > Share online . With Share online (network service), you can p ost your images, video clips, and sound clips from your device to compatible online sharing services, such as albums and 97 Media
blogs. You can also vie w and send comments to the posts in these services, and download content to your compatible Nokia dev ice. The supported content types and the a vailability of the Share online service may vary. Subscribe to services Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To subscribe to an online sharing service, go to the service provider's website, and check that your Nokia device is compatible with the serv ice. Create an account as instructed on the website. You receive a user n ame and password needed to set up your device with the account. 1. To activate a service, open the Share online ap plication in your device, select a service and Options > Activate . 2. Allow the device to create a network connection. If you are prompted for an internet access point, select one from the list. 3. Sign in to your accou nt as instructed on the service providerâÂÂs website. For the availabili ty and cost of the th ird party services an d data transfer costs, contact your service provider or the relevant t hird par ty. Manage your accounts To view your ac counts, select Options > Settings > My accounts . To create a new account, select Options > Add new account . To change your user name or password for an account, select the account and Options > Ope n . To set the account as the default when sending posts from your device, select Optio ns > Set as default . To remove an account, select the account and Options > Delete . Create a post Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To post media files to a service, select a service and Options > New upload . If the online sharing service provides channels for postin g files, select the desired channel. To add an image, video clip, or sound clip to the post, select Options > Insert . Enter a title or description for the post, if ava ilable. To add tags to the post, se lect Tags: . To send the post to the service, select Optio ns > Upload . Post files from Photos You can post your files from Photos to an online sharing service. 1. Sele ct Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and the files you want to post. 98 Media
2. Select Option s > Send > Upload and the desired account. 3. Edit your post as required. 4. Select Option s > Upload . One-click uplo ad One-click upload lets you post images to an online sharing service immediately after capturing them. To use one-click upload, ca pture an image with your device camera, and select the online sharing icon from the toolbar. Tag list Select Menu > Media > Share online . Tags describe the content of the post, and help viewers find content in the on line sharing services. To view the list of availabl e tags when creating a post, select Tags: . To add tags to your post, select a tag from the list and Done . To add sever al tags to the pos t, select each tag and Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To search for tags, enter the se arch text in the search field. To add a tag to the tag list, select Option s > New tag . Manage posts in Outbox Select Menu > Media > Share online . Outbox shows the posts y ou are currently uploading, post s that have failed t o upload, and the posts you ha ve sent. To open Outbox, select Outbox > Options > Open . To start uploading a post, select the post and Options > Upload now . To cancel uploading a post, select the pos t and Options > Cancel . To delete a post, select the post and Op tions > Delete . View service content Select Menu > Media > Share online . To view the content of a serv ice, select the service and Options > Open . To open a feed, select the f eed. To open the feed in the browser, select the service provider's website. To view comments related to a file, select the file and Options > View comm ents . To view a file in full screen mode, select the file. To update a feed, select the feed and Op tions > Update now . If you see an interesting file and want to download the entire feed to your devi ce, select the file and Options > Subscribe to contact . Service provider settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . 99 Media
To view the list of service providers, select Opti ons > Settings > Service providers . To check the details of a servic e, select the service from the list. To delete the selected service, select Options > Delete . Edit account settings Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To edit your accounts, select Options > Settings > My accounts and an ac count. To change the user name for the account, select User name . To change the password for an account, select Password . To change th e acco unt nam e, select Account name . To determine the size for images that you post, select Upload image s ize > Or iginal , Medium (1024 x 768 pixels), or Small (640 x 480 pixels). Edit advanced settings Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Advanced . To only use a wireless LAN (W LAN) connection for sharing, select Use cel lular > Disabled . To also allow a GPRS connection, select Enabled . To allow sharing and downlo ading items while outside your home network, select Allow roaming > Enabled . To download new items from the service automatically, select Download interval and the interval for the downloads. To download items manually, select Manual . Data counters Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To check the amount of data you have uploaded and downloaded, select Option s > Settings > Data transferred . To reset the counte rs, select Opt ions > Clear sent , Clear received , or Clear all . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports file formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. Play a song Select Menu > Media > Music player . To add all available songs to the music library, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song, select the desired category, and the song. 100 Media
To pause playback, press the sc roll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop pla yback, scroll down. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To skip to the next item, sc r oll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll le ft. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song has started. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equalizer . To modify the balance and ster eo image, or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key briefly. Warning: Continuous expos ure to high volum e may damage your hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Playlists To view and manage play lists, select Music library > Playlists . To create a new playlist, s elect Option s > New playl ist . To add songs to the playlist, selec t the song and Op tions > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New p laylist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll t o the song you want to move, an d select Option s > Reorder playlist . Ovi Music With Ovi Mu sic (network service), y ou can search, browse, purchase, and download music to your device. The Ovi Music service will ev entually replace the Music store. Select Menu > Media > Ovi Music . To download music, you first need to register for the service. Downloading music may involve addition al costs and the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). For information about data tr ansmission charges, contact your network service provider. To a cc ess Ov i Mu si c, you mus t h av e a v ali d in te rne t ac ce ss point in the device. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to Ovi Music. Select the access point â Select Default access point . The availability and appeara nce of Ovi Music settings may vary. The set tings may al so be predefined and you may not be able to modify them. Wh en browsing Ovi Music, you may be able to modi fy the settings. Modify Ovi Music set tings â Select Options > Settings . Ovi Music is not available for all countries or regions. Transfer music from a computer You can use the following met hods to transfer music: 101 Media
⢠To install Nokia Ovi Player to manage a nd organize your music files, download the PC software from www.ovi.com, and follow the instructions. ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a comp atible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you a re using a USB data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card mu st be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronize musi c with Windows Media Pla yer, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be in serted in the device. To change the def ault US B connection mode, select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player and Options > Go to N ow playi ng > Opti ons > Equalizer . To use a preset frequency setting when playing mu sic, select the frequency setting you want to use and Options > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit and a frequency band, and scroll up or down to adjust its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediately in the playback. To reset the frequency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own frequency setting, select Optio ns > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands , and set the frequency for each band. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays video and sound clips th at are stored on your device, transferred from an e-mail messag e, or a compatible computer, or stream ed to your device over the web. Supported file formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streamin g), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all variat ions of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video, select Video clips, and a video. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. RealPlayer recognizes two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL an d an http:// URL that poin ts to a RAM file. Before the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a website and buffer the content. If a network connection problem cau ses a playback error, RealPlayer attempts automa tically to reconnect to the internet access point. To download video clips from the web, select Downld. videos . 102 Media
To adjust the volume during playba ck, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during play back, scroll right and hold. To rewind during play, scroll left and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or the connection to the streaming site stops, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To view the video in full-screen mode, select Options > Continue in normal scr. . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video or sound clip, or web link, select Options > C lip details . Information may include for example the bit rate or the internet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Media > Real Playe r . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Opt ions > Settings > Video or Streaming . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Record er . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations . The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, select Op tions > Settings . Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conversation, open the recorder during a voice call, and select . Both pa rties hear a to ne at regular interval s during recording. Flash player With Flash player, you can vi ew, play, and interact with flash files made for mobile devices. To open Flash player and play a flash file, select the file. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Optio ns > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash file s saved in the device memory or on the memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash file quality, select Option s > Quality when you are playing the flash file. If yo u select High , the playback of some flash files may appear uneven and slow due to their origina l settings. Change the qualit y 103 Media
setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organize your flash files, select Options > Organize . FM radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or accessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. Listen to the r adio Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a call or answ er an incoming call while listening to the radio. The ra dio is muted when there is an active call. To start a st ation search, select or . If you have saved radio stations in your device, to go to the next or previous saved station, sele ct or . Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠Activate loudspeaker â L i s t e n t o t h e r a d i o u s i n g t h e loudspeaker. ⢠Manual tuning â Change the frequen cy manually. ⢠Station directo ry â View available stations based on location (network service). ⢠Save station â Save t he station to which you are currently tuned to your station list. ⢠Stations â Open the list of your sa ved stations. ⢠Play in backg round â Return to the home screen while listening to the FM radio in the background. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near you r ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Saved stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To open the list of your saved stations, select Optio ns > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To change station details, select Opt ions > Station > Edit . FM radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To automatically search for alterna tive frequencies if the reception is weak, select Options > Settings > Alternative fr equencies > Auto s can on . To set the default access point for the radio, select Options > Settings > Access point . 104 Media
To select the region wher e you currently are, select Options > Settings > Current region . This settin g is displayed only if there is no network coverage when you start the applicat ion. Nokia Internet Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . With the Nokia Internet Radio application (network service), you can listen to available radio stations on t he internet. To listen to rad io stations, you must have a wireless LAN (WLAN) or packet data access point defined in your device. Listening to the stations may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service f ees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to internet radio stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To listen to a radio station on the internet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favorites or the station directory, or search for stations by name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station manually, select Optio ns > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links with the Web browser application. Compatible links are automatically open ed in the Internet Radio application. 2. Select Optio ns > List en . The Now playing view opens, displaying information about the cu rrently play ing station and song. To pause the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll ke y again. To view station information, select Options > Stati on information (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station save d in your favorites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Favorite stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To view and listen to your favorite stations, select Favorites . To add a station manually to favorites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web add ress of the station and a name tha t you want to appear in t he favorites list. To add the currently playi ng station to favorites, s elect Options > Add to Favorite s . To view station information, to m ove a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from favorites, select Options > Station and the desired option. 105 Media
To view only stations beginnin g with particular letters or numbers, start enterin g the charact ers. Matching stations are displayed. Search for stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by name, do the following: 1. Sele ct Search . 2. Enter a station name or the first letters of the name in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations a re displayed. To listen to a station, select the stat ion and Listen . To save a station to your favori tes, select the stat ion and Options > Add to Favorite s . To make another s earch, select Options > Search again . Station director y Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio and Station director y . The station directory is mainta ined by Nokia. If you want to listen to internet radio stations outside the directory, add station information manu ally or browse for station links on the internet with the Web browser application. Select from the following: ⢠Browse by genre â View the available radio station genres. ⢠Browse by language â View the languages in which there are stations broadcasting. ⢠Browse by country/region â View the countries in which there are stat ions broadcasting. ⢠Top stations â View the most popular stations in the directory. Internet radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet rad io and Options > Settings . To select the default access point to con nect to the network, select Default access point an d from the available options. If you wa nt the device to ask you to select the access point ev ery time you open the application, select Always ask . To change the connection sp eeds for different connection types, select from the following: ⢠GPRS connection bitrate â GPRS packet data connections ⢠3G connection bitrate â 3 G p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n s ⢠Wi-Fi connection bitrate â WLAN connections The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To av oid buffering, use the highest quality only with high speed connections. 106 Media
Security and data management Manage the data and s oftware on your device, and take care of the security of th e device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus function ality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device The lock code protects your device against unaut horized use. The preset code is 12345. To lock the device, in the home screen, press the power key, and select Lock phone . To unlock your device, se lect Unlock > OK , enter the lock code, and select OK . To change the lock c ode, sel ect Menu > Ctr l. panel > Settings General > Se curity > Ph one and SIM card . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. A minimum of 4 characters is required, and numbers, symbols, and upp er and lower case letters can be used. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your devi ce. If you fo rget the lock code and your device is locked, your device will requir e service. Additional charges may apply, and all the person al data i n your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. Lock your device remotely 1. To enable remote locking, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security > Ph one and SI M car d > Remote ph one locking > Enabled . 2. Enter the text message cont ent. It can be 5-20 characters, and both uppe r and lower case letters can be used. 3. Enter the same text again to verify it. 4. Enter the lock code. 5. To lock the device remotely , write the predefined text, and send it to your device as a text messag e. To unlock your device, you need the lock code. Memory card security Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorized access. To set a password, select Options > Memory card password > Set . The password can be up to 8 characters long and is case-se nsitive. The passw ord is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you are asked for 107 Security and data m anagement
the password. Not all me mo ry cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, se lect Options > Memory card pass word > Remove . When you remove the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unauthorized use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unlock memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case the card is unlocked and pa ssword removed. Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Encryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without saving key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryption key. If you select this option, you cannot use the memory card in other devices, and if you restore factory settings, you cannot decrypt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â En crypt the memory card and save the key manually i n the default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. E nter a pass phrase for the key and a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with restored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have received. Select the key file and enter the pass phrase. Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the device memory and/or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To decrypt the memory card with out destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . To decrypt the memory card and destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and tu rn off encryptio n . Fixed dialing Select Menu > Contacts an d Options > SIM number s > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialing servi ce, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialing service. For more information, contact your service provider. 108 Security and data m anagement
When security featur es that restrict ca lls are in use (suc h as call restriction, cl osed user group, and fixed dialing), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call restriction and call forwarding cannot be active at the same tim e. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivat e fixed dialing or edit your fixed dialing contacts . Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Activate fixed dialing â Activate the fixed dialing. ⢠Deactivate fi xed dialing â Deactivate th e fixed dialing. ⢠New SIM con tact â Enter the contact name a nd phone number to which calls are allowed. ⢠Add from Contacts â C opy a contact from the list of contacts to the fixed dialing list. To send text messages t o the SIM contacts while the fixed dialing service is active , you need to a dd the text message centre number to the fixed dialing list . Certificate manager Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral > Security > Certificate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guaran tee safety. There are four different types of certificat es: authority certificates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and device certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an authority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of th e server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certi ficates should be used w h e n y o u c o n n e c t t o a n o n l i n e b a n k o r a r e m o t e s e r v e r t o transfer confidential inform ation. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software, and to check the au thenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certifica te, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the validity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Cert ificate d etails . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not trusted â You have not set any application to use the certif icate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid ye t â Th e perio d of va lidity h as not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate i ssuer. 109 Security and data m anagement
Certificate trust settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Security > Certificate management . Trusting a certificate mea ns th at you auth orize it to verify web pages, e-mai l servers, software packages and other data. Only trusted certifica tes can be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certific ates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "C ertificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change th e trust setting s, select a certificate an d Options > Trust settings . Scroll to an application field, and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot change the trust sett ings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installation â N ew Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installation â New Java application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. View and edit security modules Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Security > Security module . To view or edit a security module, select the module from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security d etails . To edit the PIN codes for th e security module, open the module, and select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change these codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of the securi ty module. To delete the key store, select Options > Delete . You may not be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Remote configuration Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings, da ta, and software on your device remotely. You can connect to a server, and receive configurat ion settings for your device. You may receive server profiles 110 Security and data m anagement
and different configuration settings from your service providers or company information management department. Configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration conn ection is usua lly started by the server when the device se ttings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server nam e â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server I D â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server pas sword â E n t e r a p a s s w o r d t o i d e n t i f y y o u r device to the server. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a ne w access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This settin g is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User na me and Passw ord â Enter your user ID and password for the co nfiguration server. ⢠Allow config uration â S e le c t Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-acce pt all requ ests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Networ k authenticat ion â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Networ k user nam e and Network password â Enter your user ID and password for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticati on to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Opt ions > Start configuration . To view the configuration log o f the selected profile, select Options > View log . To update the device soft ware over the air, select Options > Check for updates . The update does not erase your settings. W hen you re ceive the update package on your device, follow the instru ctions on the display. Your device is restarted once the installa tion is complete. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the u pdate. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. B e s u r e t o b a c k u p d a t a b e f o re accepting installation of an update. Application manager With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of 111 Security and data m anagement
installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. You can install two types of applications and software to your device: ⢠JME applications based on Java technology with the .j ad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and soft ware suitable for the Symbian operating system with the .sis or .sisx file extensions Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications and software You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatib le compute r, downlo ad them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using oth er co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia Appli cation Installer in Nokia Ovi Suite to install an application to your devic e. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . The installation files are in th e Installation files folder, and installed applications in th e Installed apps. folder. Icons indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application Application insta lled on the memory card Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing . Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the applicati on type, version number an d the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Option s > View details . To display the security certificate details of the application, select View details . ⢠If you install a file that contain s an update or repa ir to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the or iginal application, remove the application, and insta ll the application ag ain from the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to s elect one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the s erver. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an application or software: 1. To loc ate an inst allation file, press Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. , and select Installation files . Alternatively, search inst allation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message that contain s an installation file. 112 Security and data m anagement
2. In Application manager, select the application you want to install. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the in stallation. If you install an application withou t a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warn ing. Continue insta llation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an inst alled application, select the applic ation. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installat ions folder in the main menu. To see which software packa g es are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus function ality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applica tions to a compat ible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use la rge amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation file s to a compatible PC , then us e the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package and select Optio ns > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open files created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. For more infor mation, see the documentation of the inst alled software package. Application manager settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software installation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verifi ed digital signature can be installed. ⢠Online certificate check â Check the online certificates before installing an application. ⢠Default web address â Set the default address used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications ma y require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. Licenses About Licenses Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Li censes . 113 Security and data m anagement
Some media files, such as imag es, music or video clips, are protected by digital usage rights . The licenses for such files may allow or restrict their us age. For example, with some licenses you may listen to a song only a limited number of times. During one playback session you ma y rewind, fast- forward, or pause the song , but once you stop i t, you have used one of the instances allowed. Use licenses Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected content comes with an associ ated lice nse that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the license and the cont ent, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. Other transfer m ethods may not transfer th e license which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-p rotected content after the d e v i c e m e m o r y i s f o r m a t t e d . Y o u m a y a l s o n e e d t o r e s t o r e the license in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-protected content, both the license and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lo se the license and the content if the files on your device get corrupted . Losing the license or the content may limit your ab ility to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some license may be connec ted to a specific S IM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your licenses by type, select Valid licenses , Invalid li censes , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Options > License details . The following details are displayed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Lic ense is val id , Licens e expired or License not yet valid . ⢠Content sending â Allowed indicates that you can send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes indicates that the file i s in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No indicates that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a license, in the licenses main view, select Invalid li censes > O ptions > Get new license . Establish a network connection at the prompt, and you are directed to a website where yo u can pur chase rights to the media. To remove file rights, go to the desired file, and select Options > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group license view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have down loaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view fr om either the valid licenses or invalid licenses tabs. To access these files , open the group rights folder. Sync Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronize your notes , calendar entries, text and multi media messages, browser 114 Security and data m anagement
bookmarks, or contac ts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronization settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronization profile con tai ns the necessary settings for synchronization. When you open the Sync application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles , select Options and the desired option. To synchronize data, select Optio ns > Synchronize . To cancel synchronization befo re it finishes, select Cancel . Mobile VPN Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual private network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and serv ices, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the internet, to a corporate VPN gateway that acts as a front door to the compatible corporate network. The VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) technology. IPSec is a framework of open standards for supporting the secure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to aut henticate each other, and the encryption algorithms that they u se to help protect the confidentiality of data. For a VPN p olicy, contact your company's IT department . To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT administrator of your organiza tion. Manage VPN Select from the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, an d update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the con nection settings of VPN policy servers from which y ou can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manage r (NSSM), which is not necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the log for your VPN policy installations, updates a nd synchronizations, and other VPN connections. Edit VPN access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations . An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services, or to browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Vi rtual private network (VPN) access points pair VPN policies with regular internet access points to create secu re connections. Your service provider may preset some or all access points for your device, and you may not be ab le to create, edit, or remove them. 115 Security and data m anagement
Select a destination and Options > Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â E nter a name fo r the VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access p oint â Select the internet access point with which to combine the VPN policy to create secure connections for data transfer. ⢠Proxy server add ress â Enter the prox y server address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port nu mber â Enter the proxy port number. ⢠Use access point â Select whethe r connections using this access point are established a utomatically. The settings available for editing may vary. For the correct settings, contact your company's IT departm ent. Use a VPN con nection in a n applic ation You may have to prove your identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your company's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the app lication must be associated with a VPN access point. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a li st of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in whic h you want t o create a VPN connection, select a VPN access point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy au thentication, enter your VP N user name and passcode or password. If the SecurID token has become out of synchronization with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next pass code. If you are using certificate-base d authen tication, yo u may have to enter the key store password. 116 Security and data m anagement
Settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . You can define and modify var ious settings of your device. Modifying these settings a ffects the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change such s ettings. Select the setting you want t o edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider, and scroll left or right to adjust a value. General settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral . Select from the following: ⢠Personalization â Chang e the display settin gs, and personalize the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancement â Modify the settings for your accessories. ⢠Sensors â Change the sensor settings. ⢠Security â Modify the security settings. ⢠Factory settings â Restore the original settings of the devic e. ⢠Positi oning â Def ine the posi tioning method and server for GPS-based applicat ions. The available options may vary. Personalization settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gener al > Personalizati on . Display settings To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . To adjust the length of time the dis play can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver time -out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > We lcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the display dims after the last key press, select Display > Light time- out . Tone settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . 117 Settings
Select General > Personalization > To nes and from the following:. ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, y ou can specify a ringing t one for each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â If you select this setting and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringing tone tha t is a combination of the spoken name of the contac t and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you want the ringing ton e to alert you. ⢠Ringing volume â Set the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Selec t a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Calendar alarm tone â Select a tone for calendar alerts. ⢠Clock alarm to ne â Select a tone for clock alarms. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or message. ⢠Keypad tones â Set the volume level of the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. Language settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalization > Language . ⢠Phone la nguage â Set the device language. ⢠Writing language â Select the lang uage used for writing notes and messages. ⢠Predicti ve text â Activate predictive text input. ⢠Input opt ions â Define th e settings for predictive text input. Scroll key lights Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalization > Notifica tion light s . To set the scroll key to blink slowly when you do not use the device, select Standby br. light . To set the scroll key to blink rapidly when you have missed calls or received messages, select Notification light , se t the blinking time, and select the events you want to be notified of. Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalization > One-touch keys . To select which application and task is opened when you press a One-touch key, sele ct the key and Option s > Open . To restore the preset applications and tasks, select Restore defaults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Date and time . Select from the following: ⢠Date and Time â Set the current date and time. ⢠Time zone â Define your time zone. 118 Settings
⢠Date for mat and Date separato r â Define the date format and separator. ⢠Time format and Time separator â Select whet her to use the 12-hour or 24-hour clock sy stem and with which symbol to separa te hours and minutes. ⢠Clock type â Define the clock type. ⢠Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for the alarm clock. ⢠Alarm snooze ti me â Define the snooze time for the alarm clock. ⢠Workdays â Define the days of the week that are work days for you. ⢠Automati c time u pdate â Update the time, date, and time zone information automa tically (network service). Accessory settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral > Enhancement . To define which profile is activated wh en you attach an accessory to your device, select the accessory and Default profile . To set the device to ans wer phone calls automati cally after 5 seconds when an accessor y is attached, select the accessory and Automatic an swer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, automatic an swering is disabled. To illuminate the device w hile it is attached to an accessory, select Lights > On . This option is only available for certain accessories. Sensor settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gener al > Sensors . To set the device to silence an incoming call or snooze an alarm when you tu rn the device face dow n, select Turning control . Security settings Security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gener al > Security . Select from the following: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Edit the security settings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Protected c ontent â Edit your settings for DRM- protected content. ⢠Security module â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. Wh en you change a code, enter the current code, th en the new code twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone an d SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorized u se and is provided with the SIM card. After three cons ecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked and you 119 Settings
need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock automatically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out after whi ch the device is automatica lly locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SIM card > Phone aut olock period . Enter a number for the t ime-out in minutes or select No ne to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alpha bets and digits can be used, and both upperc ase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not proper ly formatt ed. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Factory setting s . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents, contact informat ion, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Positioning settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Positio ning . To use a specific positioning method to detect the location of your device , sele ct Positioning method s . To select a positioning serve r, select Positioning server . To select which me asurement system yo u want to use for speeds and distances, s elect Notation preferen ces > Measurement s ystem . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Notation pr eferences > Coordinate format . E-mail key settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General . To select which mailbox to open with the e-mail key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key and press the scroll key. Telephon e settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call forwarding â Define your call forwarding settings. See "Call forward," p. 32 . ⢠Call restriction â Define your call restricting settings. See "Call restrictions," p. 33 . 120 Settings
⢠Networ k â Adjust the network settings. Call settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Pho ne > Call . Select from the following: ⢠Send my caller ID â Display your phone number to the person you are calling. ⢠Send my internet call ID â Display your internet call address to the person you are ca lling using an intern et call. This setting is only available if you have defined internet call service setti ngs. ⢠Call waiting â S e t t h e d e v i c e t o n o t i f y y o u o f i n c o m i n g calls while you are in a call (network service). ⢠Internet call wait ing â Set the device to notify you of a new incoming intern et call while you are in a call. This setting is only avai lable if you have defined internet call service setti ngs. ⢠Internet ca ll alert â Select On to set your de vice to alert for incoming intern et calls. If you selec t Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. This setting is only available if you have defined in ternet call service settings. ⢠Decline call with msg. â R e j e c t a c a l l , a n d s e n d a t e x t message to th e caller. ⢠Message text â Write the standard text message tha t is sent when you reject a call. ⢠Own video in re cvd. call â Allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. ⢠Image in video c all â Display a still image if video is not sent during a video call. ⢠Automatic redial â Set your device to make a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redia ling, press the end key. ⢠Show call durati on â Display the length of a call during the call. ⢠Summary after call â Display the length of a call after the call. ⢠1-touc h dialing â Ac tivate 1-touch dialing. ⢠Anykey answer â Ac tivate anykey answer. ⢠Noise cancellation â Ac tivate earpiece active noise cancellation. ⢠Contact se arch â Activate contact search in the home screen. Network settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phon e > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In dual mode, the device switches automatically between networks. Tip: Selecti ng UMTS enables faster data transfer, but may increase the demand on bat tery power and reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumping be tween the two networks, which also increases the deman d on battery power. To select the operator, select Operator se lection and Manual to select from available networks, or Automatic to set the device to select the network a utomatically. 121 Settings
To set the device to indicate when it is used in a microcellular network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. ⢠USB â Edit the da ta cable settings. ⢠Destinations â Set up new or ed it existing access points. Some or all access p oints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit or remove them. ⢠VPN â Manage th e settin gs for virtual private networking. ⢠Packet data â Define when packet data network is attached, and enter the default packet switched access point name if you use your device as a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Set the device to display an indicator when a wireless LAN (WLAN) is availa ble, and define how often the device search es for networks. ⢠Video sharing â Enable video sharing, select the SIP profile for video sharing, and define the video saving settings. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session i nitiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠XDM profile â Create an XDM pr ofile. The XDM profile is required for many commu nications applications, for example, presence. ⢠Presence â Edit the settings for presence (network service). To register for the service, contact your service provider. ⢠Remote drive s â Connect the device to a remote drive. ⢠Configurat ions â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â R estrict packet d ata con nection s. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a m essage from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you select one of the access point groups ( , , , , ), you can see th e access point type s: indicates a protected ac cess point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wire less LAN (WLAN ) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new a ccess point, select Access point . The device asks you to check for available conn ections. After the search, connections that a re already available are displayed and can be shared by a new access point. If you 122 Settings
skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of a n access point, select one of the access point groups, scroll t o an access point, and select Options > Edit . Use the instructions p rovided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠Connec tion name â Enter a name for the connection. ⢠Data b earer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red * . Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if neces sary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups to connect to a network. To avoid selecting which access p oint to use every time the device attempts to connect to a n etwork, you can create a group that con tains vari ous access points, and define the order in which th e access points are used to connect to a network. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) an d packet data access points to an intern et access point group and use the group for browsing th e web. If you give the WLAN access point the higher priority, the device connects to the internet th rough a WL AN if available and thr ough a packet data connection if not. To create a new acce ss point gr oup, sele ct Options > Manage > New destinatio n . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Optio ns > New access p oint . To copy an existing access point from another group, select the group, scroll to an existing access point, and select Options > Organize > Copy to oth er dest. . To change the priority order of access points within a group, scroll to an a ccess point, and select Options > Organize > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠Access point name â The access point name is provided by your service provider. ⢠User na me â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usua lly provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt passwo rd â If you want to set the device to ask for a password every time you log into a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . ⢠Passw ord â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by your service provider. 123 Settings
⢠Authenti cation â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Depending on the access point type you are setting up, enter the we b address or the address of the multimedia message center. ⢠Use access point â Select After confirmat ion to set the device to ask for confirmation before th e connection using this a ccess point is created, or Automatically to set the device to connect to the destination using this ac cess point automa tically. Select Optio ns > Advanced sett ings and from the following: ⢠Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. Th e other settings depend on the selected network t ype. ⢠Phone IP address (for IPv4 only ) â Enter the IP address of your device. ⢠DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresse s of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. ⢠Proxy server address â Enter the address of the p roxy server. ⢠Proxy port nu mber â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Options > Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠WLAN network name â S elect Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. ⢠Network status â Define whether the network na me is displayed. ⢠WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network, and to allow devices to send an d receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the same WLAN network name. ⢠WLAN security mo de â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA2 . (802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are not available for ad hoc networks .) If you select Open net work , no encryption is u sed. The WEP, 802.1x , and WPA functions can be used on ly if the network supports them. ⢠Use access point â Select After confirmation to set the device to ask for co nfirmation before the connection using this access point is created or Automati cally to set the device to connect to the destination using this ac cess point automatica lly. To enter the settin gs for the selected security mode, select WLAN security setti ngs . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings an d from the following: ⢠IPv4 settings â Enter the IP address o f your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secon dary DNS servers. 124 Settings
Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. ⢠IPv6 settings â Define the type of DNS addr ess. ⢠Ad-hoc channel (only for ad hoc networks) â To enter a channel number (1-11 ) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy serv er address â Enter the address for the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port numbe r â Enter the proxy port numb er. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data . Your device su pports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. Wh en you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is possible to have m ultiple data connections active at the same time; access points can share a data connection, and data connectio ns remain active, for exampl e, during voice calls. To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connection and When available to register the device to the packet data netw ork when you switch the device on in a supported network, or When needed to register the device to a packet data netw ork only when an application or action attempts to establish a pa cket data connection. This setting affects all access p oints for packet data connections. To use the device as a packet data modem for your computer, select Access point , and enter the access point name provided by your service provider. To use a high-speed data connection, select Hi gh speed packet access > Enabled . WLAN settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a wireless LAN (WLAN) availa ble in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs, and to update the in dicator, select Scan for networks . This s etting is not available unless you select Show WLAN availabi lity > Yes . To set the device to test the internet capability of the selected WLAN automatically , to ask for permission every time, or to never perform th e connectivity test, select Internet connectivity te st > R un automatically , As k every time , or Neve r run . If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when th e device asks for it, and the co nnectivity tes t is perfor med successfully, the access poin t is saved to internet destinations. To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies yo ur device, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommen ded. To edit the settings manua lly, select Automatic configuration > Disabled and define the following: 125 Settings
⢠Long retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if the dev ice does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the m aximum number of transmission attempts if the dev ice does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the d ata pac ket si ze at wh ich the WLAN access point devi ce issues a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio measuremen ts â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power savi ng â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to save the power in the device battery. Using the power saving me chanism enhances the battery pe rformance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their ori ginal values, select Options > Restore default s . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the dis play. To edit a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . To enter th e settings for the se lected sec urity mode, select WLAN security se ttings . WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmit ted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not h ave the required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not encry pted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc netw ork, all de vices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settings â Edit the settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc netw ork, all de vices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN security settings > WE P key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encry ption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want to enter the WEP key data in ASCII or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 126 Settings
802.1x authenticates and authorizes de vices to access a wireless network, and p revents access if the authorizati on process fails. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you selected WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in y our device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â I f y o u s e l e c t e d WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key th at identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WPA2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in y our device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â If you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key th at identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations , and an access point group. The extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication servers , and the different EAP plug-ins make possible the use of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP p lug-ins current ly installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-i n settings, select Options > New access point and define an access point th at uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WPA 2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN security settings > WPA/W PA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in setting s . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-i n when you connect to a WLA N using the access point, select the desired pl ug-in and Options > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this access point have a check m ark next to them. T o not use a plug- in, select Option s > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Optio ns > Edit . To change the priority of the EAP plug-in s ettings, sele ct Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug-in before other plug-ins w hen connecting to the n etwork with the access point, or Op tions > Lower priority to use 127 Settings
this plug-in for network authen tication after attempting to use other plug-ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > SIP settings . The session initiation protocol (SIP) is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical communication sessions are video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Optio ns > New SIP profile > Use default profile or Use exis ting profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Op tions > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > SIP settings . Select Optio ns > Edit and from the following: ⢠Profile na me â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default destin ation â Select the destination to use for the internet connection. ⢠Default access point â Select the ac cess point to us e for the internet connection. ⢠Public us er name â Enter y our user name prov ided by your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the re gistration mode. ⢠Use secur ity â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy se rver â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar se rver â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP prof ile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermed iate servers between a browsing service and its use rs used by some se rvice providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy serv er address â Enter th e host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Password â Enter your user nam e and password for th e prox y serve r. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. 128 Settings
Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User na me and Password â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Configuration settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information ma nagement containing configuration settings for tr usted servers. These settings are automatically save d in Configurations. You m ay receive configuration settings for access points, multimedia or e-mail messaging services, or synchronization settings from trusted servers. To delete configu rations fo r a trusted serv er, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to certain access points only. Your SIM card may not sup port the access point control service. For more information, contact your service provider. To restrict packet data connections fr om your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need y our PIN2 code to activate and deacti vate access point control or to edit the packet data acce ss points on the control list. To add access points that can be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator- provided access point, cre ate an emp ty access point. To remove access points from the list, select Optio ns > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Applications . Select an application from the list to adjust its settings. 129 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Sym key. Press and hold to activate or deactivate Bluetooth conne ctivity. Ctrl key Press and hold to activate or deactivate the Silent profile. Ctrl C Copy text. Ctrl V Paste text. Ctrl X Cut text. Ctrl A Select all. Home screen Left selection key right selection key Lock and unlock the keypad and keyboard. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your homepage in the Web browser. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. You must first a ctivate 1- touch dialing in Menu > Ctrl. panel and Settings > Phone > Call > 1- touch dialing . Web shortcuts * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 0 Go to the homepage. 1 Show the toolbar 2 Open the search dialog. 3 Return to the previous page. 4 Save the current web page as a bookmark. 5 Open the map of keypad shortcuts. 6 Reload the current page. 7 View the page in full screen. 130 Shortcuts
8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. E-mail C Create a new e-mail message. D Remove the selected e-mail messages. R Create a reply message to the sender of the e-mail message. A Create a reply message to the sender and all other recipients. F Forward the e-mail message. N Open the next e-mail message. P Open the previous e-mail message. O Open the s elected e-mail message. L C hange the follow-up status of the message. J Move up one page in the e-mail message. K Move down one page in the e-mail message. T Move to the first e-mail message in the mailbox or move to the beginning of an e-mail message. B Move to the last e-mail message in the mailbox or mov e to the end of an e- mail messag e. M Open the list of e-mail folders for moving messa ges. U Change the read or unread status of an e-mail mess age. E Accept a meeting request. G Tentatively accept a meeting reques t. V Decline a meeting request. W Sort e-mail messages. I Expand and collapse t he messages. Z Start the synchronization. S Start the sea rch. Calendar shortcuts for keyboard A Open the agenda view. D Open the day view. W Open the week view. M Open the month view. T Open the to-do view. N Add a new meeting. 131 Shortcuts
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobi le communications. A digital system for mobile communications which aims at global use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wi de variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN networ k mode where two or more devices connect to each other using WLAN directly without a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your visits to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to eva luate your use of the web site, what you are interested in, what you want to read and so on. DNS Domain name service. An internet service that translates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195. Domain names are easier to remember but this t ranslation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. EAP Extensible authentication protocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless ne tworks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication servers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to GPRS, but it enables fast er connection. For availability and data transfer speed, contact your service provider. GPRS General packet radio service. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection setup and fast data transmis sion speeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and s ubscription to GPRS , contact your service provider. During a voice call, you cannot est ablish a GPRS connection, and an y existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network supports dual transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigation system. 132 Glossary
HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings hig h-speed data delivery to 3G terminals, en suring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously unavailable because of limitations in the ra dio access network. HTTP Hypertext transfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructure operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WLA N access point. PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unauthorized use. The PIN cod e is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code reques t is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digit s long . PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. The length of th e PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digit s. POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blo cked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Prot ocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying and terminati ng certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from the web without downloading them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UM TS is a 3G mobile communication system. Besides voice and data, UMTS enab les audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same 133 Glossary
time, and access points can s hare a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultaneously spea king on the phone. UPIN P IN code used in UMTS net work. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an applicati on or configure various s ettings remo tely, that you can send to your oper ator or servi ce provid er with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilita te phone calls over an IP network, such as the internet. VPN Virtual private network. VPN creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-mail. WAP Wireless applicat ion protocol. WAP is an international standard for wireless communication . WEP Wired equivalent privacy. W EP is an encryption method that encrypts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security method for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security method for WLAN. 134 Glossary
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked questions about your device, go to www.nokia.com/support. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your d evice dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. S croll to the application and press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, di scolored, or bright dots appear on the screen ev ery time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth conn ectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between th e two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I close a Bluetooth connecti on? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can close the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivi ty. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth and Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the network on you r Nokia device. Check that the WLAN access point is not on ch annels 12-13, as they cannot be ass ociated with. Q: How do I turn off the WLA N on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can speci fy that your Nokia device does not sca n, or scans less often, for available networks in the bac kground. The WLAN deactivates in between background scans. 135 Troubleshooting
To stop the background scan s, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connecti on > Wireles s LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available W LANs and connect to WLANs as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes and define the interva l in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is work ing and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have defined the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy settings correctly in the adva nced settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the signal qualit y of my WLAN connection? â Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. and Active d ata connections > Options > Details . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may encounter connection problems. Try agai n closer to the access point. Q: Why do I have problems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured the security mode correctly, and that it is the same that t he network uses. To check the security mode the network us es, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivit y > Conn. mgr. and Active data conne ctions > Op tions > Details . Check also the following: you have the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, user na mes, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I s elect a contac t for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e-ma il address. Select Menu > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is s hown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging center. This note is shown if you have selected Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging ar e defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connectio n again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message center. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval > Ma nual t o h a v e t h e multimedia messagin g center save messa ges to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multim edia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message center. If you select Off , the device does not make any n etwork connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application o r action that needs it, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connecti on > 136 Troubleshooting
Packet data > Packet dat a connection > When needed . If this does not help, restart the device. Q: How do I save battery p ower? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Deactivate Bluetooth connectivity when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the backgrou nd scans for WL AN. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Wireles s LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available W LANs and connect to WLANs as usual. ⢠Set the device to us e a pack et data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Connection > Packet dat a > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloading new maps in the Maps a pplication. Se lect Menu > Maps and Opti ons > Settings > Interne t > Connection . ⢠Change the time-out after whi ch the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personaliz ation > Displ ay > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you ar e not using. Press and hold the home key. Scro ll to the appl ication, and pres s the backspace key to close the application. 137 Troubleshooting
Green tips Save energy You do not need to charge your batt ery so often if you do the following (if available for your device): ⢠Close applications and data connections, for example, your Bluetoot h connection, when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set your device to enter power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity , if available in your device. ⢠Deactivate unneces sary sounds, such as key tone s. Recycle All materials of this device can be recovered as materials and energy. For information on how to recycle your old Nokia products, go to w ww.nokia.com/werecycle, or using a cellular phone, www. nokia.mobi/werecycle. Recycle packaging and user guid es at your local recycling scheme. For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, go to www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration . 138 Green tips
Product and safety information Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-4L. Nokia may make additional battery models available for this device. This device is intend ed for use when supplied with power from the following char gers: AC-8, AC-10. The exact charger model number may va ry depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the t alk and standby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved charg ers designated for this device. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a pr olonged period, it may be necessary to connect the char ger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the batte ry. If the battery is completely disch arged, it may take s everal minutes before the charging indicato r appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper cha rging. Unplu g the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not i n use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, si nce overcharging may shorten its li fetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Avoid extreme temperatures. Alw ays try to keep the battery between 59ðF and 77ðF (15ðC and 25ðC). Extreme temperatures reduce the capa city and lifetime of the battery. A device with a hot or cold batt ery may not work temporarily. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the po sitive ( ) and negat ive (-) terminals of the battery. (Thes e look like metal strips on the battery.) Th is might hap pe n, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the term inals may damag e the battery or the connecting object. Disposal. Do no t dispose of batte ries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle wh en possible. Do not dispose as househo ld waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery li quid contact with skin or eyes. If t his happens, flush the affected areas imm ediately with water, or seek medical help. 139 Product and safety information
Damage. Do not modify, reman ufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery or imm erse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batte ries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpose. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a servic e center for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small child ren. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia ba tteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from a Nokia authorized service center or dealer, and inspect the hologr am label using the following steps: Authenticate hol ogram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you shou ld see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the No kia Original Accessories logo when looking from an other ang le. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you have any reason to believe that your Nokia battery with the h ologram on the label is not an authentic Nokia battery, you shou ld refrain from using it , and take it to the nearest Nokia authorized servi ce center or dealer for assistance. For additional information, refer to the warranty and reference leaflet included with your Nokia device. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your w arranty covera ge. ⢠Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain mine rals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, a nd allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electr onic components can be damaged. 140 Product and safety information
⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperatyre . High temperatures can shor ten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. When the device warms to its normal temperatur e from a cold tem peratur e, moistur e can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards . ⢠Do not attempt to open the device oth er than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the devi ce. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may viola te regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimu m performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return yo ur used electronic pr oducts, batteri es, and packaging mat erials to dedicated collection points. This way you help prevent uncont rolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/ werecycle, or http:// nokia.mobi/werecycle. Additional safety information The surface of this device is nickel-free. Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. K eep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposu re guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body-worn operation should not contain metal and should position the devi ce the above-stated distance from your body. To send data file s or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Data files or messages may be 141 Product and safety information
delayed until such a connect ion is available. Follow the separation dista nce instruct ions until the transmission is completed . Parts of th e device are magnetic. M etallic materials ma y be attracted to the device. Do not pla ce credit cards or other magnetic s torage media near th e device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of radio transmit ting equipment, including wireless phones, may interf ere with the function of inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Swit ch off your device when regulations po sted instruct you to do so. Hospit als or health care facilities ma y use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimet ers (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) fr om the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer di rections for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using you r wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your hea lth care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless device s may int erfere with some hearing aids . Vehicles RF signals may affect i mproper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the ma n ufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate your warranty. Check regularly that all wire less device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, ga ses, or explosive materials in the same co mpartment as the device, its parts , or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployme nt are a. Switch off your device before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the airc raft and may be illegal. 142 Product and safety information
Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Obey a ll posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Swit ch off the device at refu eling points such as near gas pumps at serv ice stations. Observe restrictions in fuel depots, st orage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Area s with a potentially e xplosive atmosph ere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where you would be advise d to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical t ransfer or storage facilities and where the air co ntains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or met al powders. You should chec k with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propa ne or butane) to determine if this device can be safe ly used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: T h i s d e v i c e o p e r a t e s using rad io signals , wireless networks, landli ne networks and user- programmed functions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (internet ca lls), activate both th e internet calls and the cellular phone. The device may a ttempt to make emergency calls over bo th the cellular networks and through your internet call prov ider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications li ke medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, sw itch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Depe nding on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from Offline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency ca ll, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of co mmunication at the scene of an accide nt. Do not end the call until given p ermission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets gu idelines for expos ure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a rad io transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by intern ational guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independen t scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. 143 Product and safety information
The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit s tated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an opera t ing device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for us e of the device at the ear is 1.31 W/kg . Use of device accessories ma y result in different SAR values. SAR values ma y vary depending on national reporting and testing requ irements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. Your mobile device is also designed to meet the requirements for exposure to radio waves established by the Federal Communication s Commission (USA) a nd Industry Canada. These requirem ents set a SAR limit of 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.39 W/kg and when properly worn on the body is 0.88 W/kg . 144 Product and safety information
Index Symbols/Numbers 1-touch dialing 32 3-D ringing tones 87 802.1x security settin gs 126 A A-GPS (assisted GPS) 72 Access codes 12 access points 54, 122 groups 123 VPN 115 accessories settings 119 active notes 66 settings 66 active toolbar in Photos 94 albums media 94 alert ton es 117 answering calls 31 antennas 16 application manage r 111 application set tings 129 application s 111 assisted GP S (A-GPS) 72 attachments multimedia messages 47 audio files details 103 audio messages 45 audio themes 8 7 autolock period 1 19 B background image 87 backing up device memory 67 battery charging 17 inserting 15 saving power 13 blogs 62 Bluetooth 56, 57 Bluetoo th conne ctivity blocking devices 58 device visibility 56 low memory 58 pairing devices 57 receiving data 58 security 56 settings 56 turning on/off 56 bookmarks 63 browser 63 bookmark 61 bookmarks 63 browsing pages 61, 62 cache memory 63 searching cont ent 62 security 63 settings 64 toolbar 61 C cable connection 59 cache memory 63 calculator 66 calendar 26 creating entries 26 meeting requests 26 views 27 calendar key 25 call forward 32 call log 38 call restriction 33 call waitin g 32 caller ID 121 calls 30 answering 31 conference 31 dialed 38 duration of 38 missed 38 options 30 received 38 rejecting 31 restricting See fixed dialing 145 Index
settings 121 voice mail 31 camera capturing images 89 image settings 91 playing videos 91 scenes 89 sequence mode 90 toolbar 89 video clips 90 video settings 91 viewing images 90 cell broadcast 48 settings 50 certificates details 109 settings 110 charging the b attery 17 chat services (IM) 51 computer connections 59 See also data connections conference calls 31 configuration messages 129 connectors 18 contacts 27, 28 adding ringing tones 28 copyin g 20 groups 28 searching 28 settings 29 synchronizing 55, 114 contacts key 25 content synchronizing, sending, and retri evin g 20 converting currencies 6 8 measurements 68 cookies 63 currency conversions 68 customizing your device 85 D data cable 5 9 data connections PC connectivity 59 synchronization 55, 114 wireless 53 date settings 118 declining calls 31 decrypting device memory and memory card 108 device manager 110 dialed numbers 38 dictionary 70 dismissing calls 31 display settings 117 DLNA 59 duration of calls 38 E e-mail 41 accounts 43 adding attach ments 42 attachments 42 deleting 43 disconnecting 43 folders 4 3 out-of-office reply 43 reading 42 searching 43 sending 41 settings 44 setup 41 e-mail key 25 e-mail ke y settings 1 20 EAP plug-in setting s 127 using an EAP plug-in 127 encrypting device memory and memory card 108 equalizer 102 F feeds, news 62 file management 67 file manager 67 files flash files 103 fixed dialing 108 flashlight 29 FM radio 104 G gallery 92 presentations 9 2 sound clips 92 streaming links 92 general information 10 146 Index
GPRS settings 125 GPS position requests 73 GPS (Global Positioning System) 72 GPS (global pos itioning system) 72 H headset 19 help application 11 home key 25 home screen 23, 24 settings 86 I IAPs (internet access points) 54 IM (instant messaging) 51 images editing 96 printing 97 installing applications 112 internet browser 61 Internet calls 121 internet connection 61 See also browser internet radio 105 favorites 10 5 searching for stations 106 settings 106 station directory 106 J Java applications 111 JME Java application support 111 K key store 110 keypad lock settings 119 tones 117 keys 18 WEP keys 126 L landmarks 74 langua ge settings 118 licenses 114 location information 72 lock code 12, 17, 107, 1 19 locking device 107 device autolock 119 keypad 119 logos welcome logo 117 M Maps 76 browsing 76 changing views 77 compass 77 display elements 77, 82 downloading maps 77 driving routes 81 Favorites 80 finding locations 78 navigating 81, 83 organizing places 80 organizing routes 80 planning routes 83 positioning 78 saving places 79 saving routes 79 sending p laces 80 sharing locations 81 shortcuts 84 synchronizing 80 traffic information 82 viewing location details 79 voice guidance 81 walking routes 83 measurements converting 68 media radio 104 meeting reques ts receiving 43 memory clearing 14 web cache 63 memory card 16 locking 107 passwords 107 message reader 44 messages 40 cell broadcast s ettings 50 configuration messages 129 service messages 48 147 Index
settings 50 speech options 44 text message setti ngs 49 messaging folder s 40 Mini Map 62 MMS (multimedia message service) 45, 49 multimed ia 92 multimed ia messages 45, 49 attachments 47 creating presentations 46 receiving 46 reply ing t o 46 multitas king 29 music pla yer playing 100 playlists 101 N navigati on tools 72 network settings 121 network setting s 52 news feeds 62 Nokia Ovi Player 101 Nokia support inf ormation 10 notes 70 O One-touch keys 118 operato r selecting 121 Optical N avi key 25 original settings 120 out-of-offi ce reply 43 Ovi by Nokia 22 Ovi Music 101 Ovi Store 22 Ovi Suite 21 P packet data restricting 129 settings 125 packet data connection access point settings 123 counters 38 page overview 62 PDF reader 68 personalizati on changing lang uage 118 display 117 tones 117 photos editing 9 6 file details 94 organizing files 94 red-eye 9 6 tags 95 toolbar 9 4 viewing 93 PictBridge 97 pictures copying 20 PIN code 12, 17 changing 119 PIN2 code 12 playing video and audio 102 positionin g settings 120 positioning i nformation 72 positionin g settings 7 5 predict ive text inpu t 118 present ations 46, 92 printer settings 69 printing 69 images 97 profiles creating 85 customizing 86 personalizing 85 selecting ringing tones 85 proxy settings 123 PUK code 12 R radio 104 settings 104 stations 104 RealPlayer playing media clips 1 02 settings 103 viewing clip details 103 red-eye removal 96 rejecting calls 31 remote configuration 110 remote database search 28 remote lock 107 remote SIM mo de 58 restoring original settings 120 148 Index
ringing tones 117 3-D 87 contacts 28 in profiles 85 vibrating alert 117 roaming 5 2 S screen saver 87, 117 scroll key 118 searching contacts 28 security browser 63 device and SIM card 119 memory card 107 security code 12, 107 security module 110 sensor settings 26, 119 service commands 48 service messages 48 settings 50 settings access points 122, 123 accessories 119 active notes 66 advanced WLAN 125 applications 129 Bluetooth connectivity 56 browser 64 calling 121 camera 91 cell broadcast 50 certificate 110 contacts 29 date 118 display 117 e-mail key 120 EAP plug-ins 127 FM radio 104 GPRS 125 internet radio 106 keypad lock 119 language 118 lights 118 messages 49 network 52, 121 packet data 125 packet data access poi nts 123 positioning 75, 120 printer 69 RealPlayer 103 restoring 120 security 119 sensor setting s 11 9 service messages 50 SIP 128 text messages 49 time 118 tones 117 video sharing 3 6 WEP security 126 WLAN 55, 124, 125 WLAN internet access points 124 WLAN security 126 Share online 97 account settings 100 accounts 98 activating services 98 advanced settings 100 creating posts 98 data counters 100 one-click upload 99 Outbox 99 posting 98 service content 99 service provider settings 99 subsc ribin g 98 tags 99 shared video 35 sharing media files online 97 shortcuts 84, 130 SIM card inserting 15 text messages 46 SIP creating profiles 128 editing profiles 12 8 editing proxy servers 128 editing registration servers 129 settings 128 slide show 95 SMS (short message service) 45 software updating 11 software applications 1 11 software updates 10, 11 sound clips 92 speech 44 streaming links 92 support 10 Symbian applications 111 synchronization of data 55, 114 149 Index
T text changing si ze 117 writing 19 text message s messages on S IM card 46 sending 45 settings 49 themes 87 audio 87 downloadi ng 87 time settings 118 tones 117 settings 117 transferring content 20 transferring music 101 troubleshooti ng 135 U updates 11 applications 10 device software 10 UPIN cod e 12 changing 119 uploading media files 97 UPUK code 12 USB data c able 59 useful info rmation 10 V vibrating alert 117 video playing 91 video calls 34, 35 options during 35 video clips details 103 playing 102 shared 35 video sharing accepting invitation 37 sharing live video 36 sharing video clips 36 videos copying 20 virtual private network use in applications 116 voice calls See calls voice commands 33 voice mail calling 31 changing number 31 VPN access points 115 use in applications 116 W warning ton es 117 web browser 61 web connection 61 welcome note 117 WEP keys 126 security settings 126 wireless LAN (WLA N) 5 3 WLAN 802.1x security settings 126 advanced setti ngs 125 MAC address 55, 125 security settings 126 settings 55, 125 WEP keys 126 WPA security settings 127 WLAN (wireles s local area network) 53 WPA security settings 127 wrist strap 19 writing 19 Z Zip manager 68 150 Index
DECLARATION OF CON FORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPOR ATION declares tha t this RM-529 product is in compliance with the es sential requ irements and other relevant provisions of Directiv e 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Decla ration of Conformity can be found at http://w ww.nokia.com/ phones/declaration _of_con formity /. é 2010 Nokia. All rights rese rved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Eser ies, No kia E72, and Navi are trademarks or regist ered trademarks of No kia Corporation. Noki a tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenam es of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, distrib ution, or storage of part or all of the cont ents in this document in any form with out the prior written permiss ion of Nokia is prohibited . Nokia operat es a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any o f the products describ ed in this document without prior notice. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. This p roduct is licens ed under the MPEG -4 Visu al Patent Portfol io Licens e (i) for personal and nonco mmercial us e in con nection with information which h as been encoded in co mpliance with the MPEG-4 Visua l Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and nonco mmercial activity and ( i i) for use in connectio n with MPEG-4 video pro vided by a lice nsed video prov ider. No lic ense is granted or shall be i mplied for any other u se. Additiona l information, including that related to promoti onal, internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXI MUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER N O CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY O F ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONS EQUENTIAL OR IN DIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CON TENTS OF T HIS DOCUME NT ARE PR OVIDED "A S IS". EXC EPT AS REQ UIRED BY APPLICAB LE LAW, N O WARRANT IES OF ANY K IND, EITH ER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED T O, THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MER CHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE MADE IN RE LA TION TO THE ACCURACY , RELIAB ILITY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOC UMENT. NOKI A RESERVE S THE RIG HT TO REVI SE THIS DOCUMENT O R WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TI ME WITHOUT P RIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the devi ce is prohibited to the extent permitted by applicab le law. Insofa r as this u ser gui de contains any limitations on Nokia's representations, wa rranties, damages and liab ilities, such limitations shall lik ewise limit any representations, warran ties, damages and liabilit ies of Nokia's licen sors. The thi rd-party applicat ions prov ided with your devic e may have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affili ated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrig hts or intellectual property rights to the third- party applications. As such, N okia does not take any responsibility for en d-user support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the applicatio ns or these materials. Nokia do es not provide a ny wa rranty for the third-party applications. B Y USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKN OWLEDGE THAT TH E APPLICATION S ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANT Y OF ANY K IND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMU M EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABL E LAW. YOU FURTHE R ACKNOWLEDG E THAT NEITHER N OKIA NOR ITS AF FILIATES MAKE ANY REPRE SENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMI TED TO WARRA NTIES OF TITL E, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICU LAR P URPOSE, OR THAT THE APPLICATION S WILL NOT IN FRINGE ANY T HIRD-PARTY P ATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARK S, OR OTHER RIG HTS.
The availability of particular p roducts an d applications and services for these prod uc ts may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details and availability of language optio ns. This device may contain commodities, tech nology or software subject to export la ws and regula tions from the US and other countries. Diversion contra ry to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, wh en using a telephon e in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Ind ustry Canada can require you to sto p using your telephone if such interferen ce cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local servic e facility . This devic e complies with par t 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device ma y not cause ha r mful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfer ence that may cau se undesired operation. Any changes or modific ations not expressly approved by Nokia could v oid the user's au thority to operate this equipment. /Issue 2.2 EN-US
Contents Safety.............. ..................... ............... ..............7 About your device........................................ .........................7 Network services.................. ..................... ........................ ....8 About Digital Rights Management............................. .........8 Battery removing......................................... .........................9 Find help................... .......................... ............10 Support................................................................................10 Update device software................................ .....................10 In-device help.. ................... .................. .................... ...........11 Accessibility solutions................................................. .......12 Do more with your device............... ........... ........... ............1 2 Settings................. ....................................... ........................12 Access codes................................................ ........................12 Prolong battery life........................ ............... ................... ..13 Free memory.......................................................................14 Get started........................... ...........................15 Insert the SIM card an d battery.............................. ...........15 Insert the memory card..................................... ................16 Remove the memory card.............. ................... .................16 Antenna locations............ ......................... ..........................16 Switch the device on or off................................................17 Charge the battery............... ........................................... ....17 Keys and parts................. ....................................... .............18 Headset........................... ..................................................... 19 Wrist strap........................................ ...................................19 Write text................. .................... .................... ................... .19 Nokia Switch...................................... .............................. ...20 Nokia Ovi Suite......... ...................................................... .....21 Visit Ovi by Nokia................................................................22 About Ovi Store...................................................................22 Your Nokia E72 ... ............ ............ ............ .......2 3 Key features.......... ....................... ..................... ...................23 Home screen.................. ..................... ....................... ..........23 One-touch keys................................ ............................. ......24 Optical Navi key..................................... ................... ..........25 Turn to silence calls or alarms ...........................................26 Calendar.................................... .......................................... .26 Contacts...............................................................................27 Multitasking....... ............... ................... .................. ..............29 Flashlight................................................................... ..........29 Make calls............................. ..........................30 Voice calls .......................................................................... .30 Options during a call.......................................... ................30 Voice mail............................................................................31 Answer or decline a call...................................... ...............31 Make a conference call.............................................. .........31 1-touch dial a phone number...... ...................... ................32 Call waiting............. ....................... ....................... ...............32 Call forw ard.........................................................................32 Call restrictions............................ .......................... .............33 Voice dialing............. ............................... ...................... ......33 Make a video call............... ........................ ...................... ....34 Options during a video call................... .............................35 Answer or decline a video call........................ ...................35 Video sharing......................................................................35 Log................. ..................... ................ ..................... .............38 Contents
Messaging............ ............... ................. ...........40 Messaging folders....................... ........................................40 Organize messages........ ........................ .............................40 E-mail service......................................................................41 E-mail.................................................................. .................41 Message reader...................................................................44 Speech................ ........................ .......................... ................44 Text and multimedia messag es............. ................... ........45 Special message types..................... ............... .............. .....48 Cell broadcast................................. .....................................48 Messaging settings. ............................................................49 About Chat................................ ...........................................51 Connectivity............. .................... ...................52 Data connections and access points.......................... .......52 Network settings....................................................... .........52 Wi-Fi/WLAN connection ......... ............... ............. ............... 53 Active data connections .....................................................55 Sync............................................................................ ..........55 Bluetooth connectivity.......... .............................................56 Data cable.................................. ..........................................59 PC connections....................................................................59 About home network.........................................................59 Internet....................... ........................ ...........61 Browse the web............................................ ......................61 Browser toolbar..................................................................61 Navigate pag es...................................... ............................. 62 Web feeds and blogs..........................................................62 Content search.............................................................. ......62 Bookmarks............ ..................... ....................... ................. ..63 Empty the cache................ ....................... .......................... .63 End the connection......... .................................. ..................63 Connection security............................................................63 Web settings ................................... ............................... .....64 Nokia Office Too ls.............. ...................... .......66 Active notes......................... ................................................66 Calculator................... .................................... ......................66 File manager.............................................. .........................67 Quickoffice........................... ......................................... .......67 Converter.............................................................................68 Zip manager........................................................................68 PDF reader...................................................................... .....68 Printing................... ........................................................ .....69 Dictionary....................................................................... .....70 Notes ...................... .................................................... .........70 Positioni ng (GPS)............................................72 About GPS............................................................................72 Assisted GPS (A-GPS)...........................................................72 Hold your device correctly...................... ................. ..........73 Tips on creating a GPS conn ection....................................73 Position requests...................... ..........................................73 Landmarks................... ........................................................74 GPS data............... .................................... ............................74 Positioning setting s.............. .................. ............... ............75 Maps....................... ................. ................... ....76 Maps overview............................................................ ........76 My position................................... .......................................76 Find places...... ................................. .............................. ......78 Manage places and routes.................................................79 Share location.....................................................................81 Drive and Walk............................................. .......................81 Maps shortcuts....................................................................84 Personalization.................. .............. ........... ...85 Contents
Profiles........................... ..................................................... .85 Select ringing tones..... ......................... ....................... .......85 Customize profiles..............................................................86 Customize the home screen.................. ............ .............. ..86 Change the display theme................................ .................87 Download a theme.............................................................87 Change audio themes......... ..................... .................... .......87 3-D ringing tones...... ..........................................................87 Media..............................................................89 Camera................................................ .................................89 Gallery..................................................................................92 Photos............................. ................................................ .....93 Share online.................................................. ......................97 Music player....................................... ......................... ......100 RealPlayer................... ............................ ...........................102 Recorder...................................... ......................................103 Flash player.......................................................................103 FM radio............................................................ .................104 Nokia Internet Radio............ ............................................105 Security and data mana gement...................107 Lock the device............................................. ....................107 Memory card security.......................................................107 Encryption.............................................. ...........................108 Fixed dialing............. ........................ ...................... ...........108 Certificate manager............ .............................................. 109 View and edit security modules.............. ........................110 Remote configuration.................................... ..................110 Application manager. .................................. .....................111 Licenses........................................... ..................................113 Sync........................... ......................................................... 114 Mobile VPN............................... ...................... ...................115 Settings............... ........... ............. ........... ......117 General settings.............. ........................................ ..........117 Telephone settings........ ...................................................120 Connection settings..... ......................... ............................ 122 Application settings............................ .............. ...............129 Shortcuts................... .............. ........... ..........130 General shortcuts............ ................... ................... ............130 Glossary............................................ ............132 Troubleshooting......... ............. ................. ....135 Green tips.................. ................. ..................138 Save energy................................. ......................................138 Recycle...............................................................................138 Product and safety information.................. .139 Index................... ............. ................. ...........145 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESI STANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the UMTS 850, 1900, and 2100 MHz networks, and GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 MHz networks . Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your device supports severa l connectivity methods an d like computers may be expo sed to viruses and other harmful conten t. Exercise caution wit h messages, connectivity requests, brow sing, and downloads. Only install and use services a nd software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and protection, such as applications that are Symbian S igned or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites an d may allow you to access third-party sites. These are n ot affiliated with Noki a, and Nokia does not endorse o r assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take precauti ons for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the devi ce mu st be switched on. Do 7 Safety
not switch the device on wh en wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent some images, music, an d other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecti ng to any other devi ce, read its user guide for detailed safety inst ructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Refer to the user guide fo r other important information about your device. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some featur es are not available on all networks; other features may require th at you make specific arrangements with yo ur service provider to use them. Network services invo lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roami ng on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limi tations that affect how you can use some features of this device requiring network support such as suppo rt for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and language-d ependent characters. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not act i vated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have customized items such as menu names, menu order, and icons. About Digital Rights Management When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legi timate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent you from copying, modifying, or transferring images, music, and other co ntent. Content owners may use differe nt types of digital rights management (DRM) tech nologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyright s. This device uses various types of DRM software to access D RM- protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10 and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM software's a bility to access new DRM- protected content be revo ked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM- protected content alr eady in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of co ntent protected with other types of DRM or the use o f non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights ma nagement (DRM) protect ed content comes with an ass ociated lice nse th at defines your rights to use the content. 8 Safety
If your device has OM A DRM-protected co ntent, to back up both the license and the cont ent, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. Other transfer methods may not tran sfer the licenses which need to be restored wi th the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the license in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-protected co ntent, both the license and the content will be lost if the device mem ory is formatted. You may also lose the license and th e content if the files on your device ge t corrupted. Losing the license or the content may limit yo ur ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licenses may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Battery removing Switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 9 Safety
Find help For local services and warran ty information, please refer to the separate booklet. Support When you want to learn more about how to use your product or you are unsure how your dev ice should function, go to w ww.nokia.com/support , or using a cellular phone, www.noki a.mobi/support. You can also select Menu > Applicatio ns > Help > Help in your devic e. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and swit ch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolved, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia.com/repair , or in Latin America, www.nokia-latinoamerica.com/ centrosdeservicio. Before sending your device for repair , always back up the data in your device. Update device software About device software and application updates With device softw are updates and applic ation updates, you can get new features and enhanced function s for your device. Updating the software may also improve your device's performance. It is recommended that you back up your personal data before updating your device software. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use t he device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting installation of an update. Downloading soft ware updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). 10 Find help
Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. After you update your device software or applications, the instructions in the user guide ma y no longer be up to date. Software updates over the air Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > SW update . With Software update (netwo rk service), you can check if there are updates available fo r your device software or applications, and download th em to your device. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is complet ed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting installati on of an update. After updating your device software or applications using Software update, the instru ctions related to the updated applications in the user guid e or the helps may no longer be up to date. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Start up date â Download the available updates . To unmark specific updates that you do not want to download, select the updates from the list. ⢠Update v ia PC â Update your device using a PC. This option replaces the Start update option when updates are only available using th e Nokia Software Updater PC application. ⢠View details â View information on an update. ⢠View update history â View the status of previous updates. ⢠Settings â Change the settings, such as the default access point used for downloading updates. ⢠Disclaimer â View the Nokia licenc e agreement. Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that en ables you to update your device so ftware. To update yo ur device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible US B data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater applicat ion, go to www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate, or in La tin America, www.nokia- latinoamerica.com/nsu. In-device help Your device contains instructions t o help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access th e help text for the current view, select Options > Help . 11 Find help
When you are reading the instructions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font si ze . You may find links to related topics at the end of the help text. If you select an underl ined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts use the following indicators: Link to a related h elp topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the application that is open in the background, select Options > Show ope n apps. and the desired application. Accessibility solutions Nokia is committed to making mobile phones ea sy to use for all individuals, including those with disabilities. For more information, visit the N okia website at www.nokiaaccessibility. com. Do more with your device There are various applications provided by Nokia and third party software developers, th at help you do more with your device. To find and download applications, visit the Ovi Store at store.ovi.com. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the product support pages at www.n okia.com/support or y our local Nokia website. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, stre aming, and mobile internet settings automatica lly configured, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your serv ice providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service prov iders as a s pecial message. You can change the general se ttings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. ⢠Personal identification number (PIN) code â Protect your device and SIM card a gainst unauthorized use. The PIN code (4 - 8 digits) is usually supplied wi th the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. ⢠UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by 3G cellular phones. ⢠PIN2 code â This code (4 - 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device. ⢠Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device a gainst unauthorized use. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the code, and set the device to 12 Find help
request the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. Additional charges may apply, and all the personal data in your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care Point or your device dealer. ⢠Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with th e SIM card, contact the network service provider whose SIM card is in your device. ⢠UPUK code â This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the network service provider whose USIM card is in your device. ⢠International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number â This number (15 or 17 digits) is used to identify valid devices on the GSM network. Devices that are, for example, stolen, ca n be blocked from ac cessing the network. The IMEI number for y our device can be found under the battery. Prolong battery life Many features in your devi ce increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, observe the following: ⢠Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background w hile using other features, increase th e demand on battery power. Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the back ground while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power. The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect, not connected to another a ccess point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device not sca n, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connectio n settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the devi ce periodically tries to establish a GPRS connection . To prolong the operating time of your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠The Maps appli cation downloads new ma p information when you scroll to new areas on the ma p, which increases the demand on battery power. You can prevent th e automatic download of new map s. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeated ly. This incr eases th e demand on bat tery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the n etwork settings, the device searches for the 3G network. You can set the device to use on ly the GSM network. To use only the GSM network, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Netwo rk > Network mode > GSM . ⢠The backlight of the displa y increases the demand on battery power. In the disp lay setting s, you can chan ge the length of the time-out peri od after which the 13 Find help
backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalization > Display > Light t ime-out . To adju st the light sens or that observes lighting condit ions and adjusts t he display brightness, in th e display settings, s elect Light sensor . ⢠To save power, activate the power save mode. P ress the power key, and select Activate power s aving . To deactivate it, press the power key, and select Deactivate power saving . You may not be able to change the sett ings of ce rtain applications when the power save mode is activated. Free memory To view how much m emory is available for different data types, select Menu > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if available memory is low. To free memory, transfer data to an alternative memory (if available) or compatible computer. To remove data you no long er need, use File manager or the respective application. You can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Application manager that y ou do not need ⢠Installation files (w ith .sis or .sisx file extensions) of installed applications. Back up the inst allat ion files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Photos. 14 Find help
Get started Insert the SIM card and battery Important: Do not use a mini-UICC SIM card, also known as a micro-SIM card, a micro-SIM card with an adapter, or a SIM card that has a mini-UICC cutout (see figure) in this device. A micro- SIM card is smaller than the standard SIM card. This device does not support th e use of micro-SIM cards and use of incompatible SIM cards may damage the card or the de vice, and may corrupt data stored on the card. Sa fe r em o va l . A lw a ys sw i tc h th e de vi ce o ff an d disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 1. Remove the back cover. 2. Remove the battery, if insert ed. 3. Pull out the SIM card holder and insert the SIM card. Ensure that the gold-colored contact area on the card faces downwards and that th e bevelled corner of the card faces the bevelled corner of the holder. Pus h the SIM card holder back in place. 4. Align the battery contacts with the battery compartment connectors, and ins ert the battery. 5. Replace the back cover. 15 Get started
Insert the memory card Use only compatible micr oSD and microSDHC cards approved by Nokia for use with th is device. Nokia uses approved industry s tandards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully comp atible with this device. Incompatible cards may dama ge the card and the device and corrupt data stored on the card. A memory card may already be inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1. Insert a compatible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the ca rd is facing up and towards the sl ot. 2. Push the ca rd in. You can hea r a click when the card locks into place. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when th e card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1. Before you remove the me mory card, press the power key, and select Remov e memory c ard . All applications are closed. 2. Whe n Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3. Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displ ayed. 4. Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5. Pull out the memory card, and close the memory card slot cover. If the device is switched on, select OK . Antenna locations Your device may have internal and exte rnal antennas. Avoid touching the anten na area unnecessaril y while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with antennas affects the communicat ion quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. 16 Get started
Switch the device on or off Switch on 1. Press and h old the power k ey. 2. If prompted, enter a PIN code or lock code, and select OK . T he preset lock code is 12345. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional charges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Ca re point or your device dealer. Switch off â Press the power key br iefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the battery Your battery has been partially charged at the factory. If the device indicates a low charge, do the following: 1. Connect the charger to a wall ou tlet. 2. Connect the charger to the device. If you are using a USB charger, connect the charger plug to the USB connector. 3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specifi c length of time, and you can use t he de vice while it is charging. If the battery is com pletely disc harged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator a ppears on the display or before any calls can be made. Charging with the USB data cable Charging with the USB da ta cable is slower than charging with the charger. Charging with the USB data cable may not work if you us e a USB hub. US B hubs may be incompatible for charging a USB device. When the USB data cable is connected, you can transfer data at the same time as charging. 1. Connect a compatible USB de vice to your device using a compatible USB data cable. Depending on the type of the device that is used for charging, it may ta ke a while for charging to s tart. 2. If the device is switched on, select from the available USB modes. 17 Get started
Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Headset connector 3 â Earpiece 4 â Optical Navi⢠key (scroll key) 5 â Selection key 6 â Call key 7 â Microphone 8 â Keypad 9 â End key 10 â Selection key 11 â Light sensor 12 â Secondary camera 1 â Function key. 2 â Shift key 3 â Sym key. 4 â Backspace key 5 â Enter key 6 â Control key 1 â Micro USB connector 2 â Memory card slot 3 â Volume up key 4 â Voice key 5 â Volume down key 18 Get started
Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The su rface of this device contains stainless steel. During extended operation su ch as an active video call and high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working proper ly, take it to th e nearest authorized service facility. Headset You can conn ect a compatible h eadset or compat ible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. To make handsfree phone calls, use a headset with a compatible remote control unit, or u se the microphone on the device. Warning: W hen you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety . Wrist strap Thread the wrist strap, an d tighten it. Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to differe nt sales markets. Write text with the keyboard Your device has a full keyboard. To insert punctuation ma rks, press the corresponding key or a combination of keys. To switch between the differen t character cases, press the Shift key. To insert digits or characters printed at the top of keys, press and hold the corresponding key, or press and hold the function key and pres s the corresponding key. To erase a character, press the backs pace key. To erase several characters, p ress and hold the backspace key. To insert characters an d symbols that are not shown on the keyboard, press the Sym key. To copy text, press and hold the Sh ift key, and scroll to highlight the word, phrase, or line of text you want to copy. Press Ctr l C . To insert the text into a document, move to the correct place, and press Ctrl V . 19 Get started
To change the writing langua ge , or to activate predictive text input, select Optio ns > Input options and from th e available option s. Nokia Switch Copy content from your old device You can use the Switch applic ation to copy content such as phone numbe rs, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous compatible Nokia device to your new devic e. Copy content for the first time 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . 2. Pai r the tw o devi ces. To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. Yo u are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices ar e now paired. If your old Nokia device does not have the Switch application, your new device sends it in a message. Open the message in the old device, and follow the instructions on the display. 3. On your device, select the content yo u want to tran sfer from the other device. When the transfer has sta rted, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. The type of content that ca n be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that devi ce supports synchroni zation, you can also synchronize data between the device s. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. Synchronize, retrieve, or send content Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Switch . After the first transfer, select from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronize content between your device and th e other device, if the other devi ce supports synchronization. The synchronization is two-way . If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cann ot restore deleted items with synchroniz ation. 20 Get started
to retrieve content from the other device to your device. With retrieval, content is transferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to ke ep or delete the original content in the other device, depending on the device model. t o s e n d c o n t e n t f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o y o u r o t h e r d e v i c e If you cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia in your devi ce. When you selec t the folder to transfer, the item s are synchronized in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Options > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every tr ansfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in th e main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conf licts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attemp ts to merg e the changes automatically. If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Prio rity to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. Nokia Ovi Suite Nokia Ovi Suite is a set of a pplications th at you can install to a compatible PC. O vi Su ite groups all available applications in a launcher window from which you can open the applications. Ovi Sui te may be included on a memory card, if provided with your device. You can use Ovi Suite to syn chronize contacts, cale ndar, and to-do and other notes between your device and a compatible PC applicat ion. You can also use Ovi Suit e to transfer bookmarks between your device and compatible browsers, and tran sfer imag es and videos between your device and a compat ible PC. Pay attention to synchronizat ion settings. Data deletion as part of normal synchron ization process is determined by the settings selected. To use Ovi Suite, you need a PC that runs Microsoft Windows XP (SP2 or newer) or Windows Vista (SP1 or newer), and is compatible with a USB data cable or with Bluetooth connectivity. Ovi Suite is not compatible with Apple Macintosh computers. For further information on Ovi Suite, see the built-in help, or go to www.nokia.com/ support. Install Nokia Ovi Suite 1. Ensure the memory card is inserted in your Nokia E72. 2. Connect the USB cable. Your PC recognizes the new device and installs the necessary drivers. This can take several minutes to complete. 21 Get started
3. Sele ct Mass storage as the USB connection mode in your device. Your device is displayed in the Windows file browser as a Removable Disk. 4. Open the root of the me mory card drive with the Windows file browser, and select the Ovi Suite installation file. 5. The installation is started. Follow the instructions. Tip: To update Ovi Suite, or if you have problems when installing Ovi Suit e from the memory card, copy the installation file to your PC, and install from your PC. Visit Ovi by Nokia With Ovi by Nokia, you can find new places and services, and stay in touch wit h your friends. You can do, for example, the following: ⢠Create a mail account ⢠Plan trips and view locations on a map ⢠Download games, applicat ions, videos, and ringing tones to your device ⢠Purchase music The available services may vary by country or region, and not all languages are supported. To access Nokia's Ovi se rvices, go to www.ovi. com, and register yo ur own Nokia account. For more information, go to www.ovi.com/support . About Ovi Store With Ovi Store, you ca n download mobile games, applications, videos, pictu res, themes, and ringing tones to your device. Some items are free of charge; others you n e e d t o p a y f o r w i t h y o u r c r e d it c a r d o r i n y o u r p h o n e b i l l . The availability of paymen t methods depends on your country of residence and your network service provider. Ovi Store offers content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. 22 Get started
Your Nokia E72 Your new Nokia Eseries dev i ce contains new versions of the Calendar, Con tacts, and E-mail applic ations, as w ell as a new home screen. Key features Your new Nokia E72 h elps you man age your busi ness and personal information. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Read and reply to your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date and plan your meetings with the Calendar app lication. Manage your business part ners and free time friends with the Contacts application. Connect to a wireless LAN (WLA N) with the WLAN wizard application. Work with documents, sprea dsheets, and presentations with the Quickoffice applicati on. Find points of interest with the Maps application. Switch from business to personal mode. Edit the appearance and setu p of your home screen with the Modes application. Browse y our comp any intran et with the Intranet application. Move your contact and calendar i nformation from a previous device to your Nokia E72 with the Switch application. Check the available updates for ap plications and download them to your device with the Software update application. Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Home screen Home screen In the home sc reen, you can quickly a ccess your most frequently used application s, and view at a gl ance if you have missed calls or new messages. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. 23 Your Nokia E 72
The home screen consists of the following: 1. Application shortcuts. To access an application, select the shortcut of the application. 2. Information area. To check an item displayed in the information area, select the item. 3. Notification area . To view the notifications, scroll to a box. A box is only visible if there are items in it. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, for example, one screen to show your business e-mail and notifications, and another to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not have to see business- related messages outside office hours. To switch between the home screens, select . To define which items and sh ortcuts you wa nt in the home screen, and to set the appearance of the h ome screen, select Menu > Ctrl. panel an d Modes . Work on the home screen To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering the contact's name. Select the desired contact from t he list of proposed matches. This fe ature may not be av ailable in all languages. To call the contact, press the ca ll key. To disable the contact search, select Options > Contact search off . To check your received messages, select the message box in the notification area. To rea d a message, select the message. To access other tasks, scroll right. To view your missed calls, select the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, select a call, and press the call key. To send a text message to a caller, select a call, scroll right, and select Send messa ge from the list of available actions. T o l i s t e n t o y o u r v o i c e m a i l , s e lect the voice mail box in the notification area. Select the desired voice mailbox, an d press the call key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys, you can access appli cations and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an application or a task. To change these, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalization > One-tou ch keys . Your service provider may have assigned applications to the keys, i n which case you cannot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts k ey 3 â Calendar key 24 Your Nokia E 72
4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home scre en, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access th e menu. To view the list of active applications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the li st. To open the selected application, press the home key for a few seconds or press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts app lication, press the cont acts key briefly. To create a new contact, press t he contacts key for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default ma ilbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Optical Navi key To browse and na vigate web pages and map s, and to scroll through lists, slide your finger on the Optical Navi key (scroll key). To scroll through a list, one item at a time, slide your finger slowly on the scroll key. To sc roll through a list, many items at a time, or to move around on the display, slide your finger quickly on the scroll key. Capture images â To autofocus in camera, hold your finger on the scroll key. To capture an image, press the scroll key. Optical Navi key settin gs â To activate or deactivate the Optical Navi key or modify other setting s, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personalizati on > Optical Navi key . 25 Your Nokia E 72
Turn to silence calls or alarms When you have activated the sens ors in your device, you can silence incoming calls or snooze alarms by turning the device face down. To define the turning options, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Senso rs > Turning control . Calendar About Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . With cale ndar, you ca n create and view scheduled events and appointments, and switch between different calendar views. In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Annivers ary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entrie s of the selected day are displayed as a list. To open calendar entries, select a calendar v iew and an entry. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to acce ss a list of available actions. T o close the list, scroll left. Create calendar entries Select Menu > Calendar . You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that have a specif ic date and tim e. ⢠Meeting requests are in vitations that you can send to the participants. Before you can create meeting requests you must have a compatible mailbox configured to your device. ⢠Memo entries are relate d to the whole day but not to a specif ic tim e of th e day. ⢠Anniversary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task that has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, select a date, Options > New entry , and the entry type. To set the priority for meeting entries, select Options > Priority . To define how the ent ry is handled during synchronization, select Private to hide the ent ry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers, or None to not copy the entry to your computer. To send the entr y to a compatible dev ice, select Options > Send . To make a meeting request fr om a meeting entry, select Options > Add participants . Create meeting requests Select Menu > Calendar . 26 Your Nokia E 72
Before you can create meeting requests, you must have a compatible mailbox configured for your device. To create a meeting entry: 1. To create a meeting en try, select a day and Op tions > New entry > Meeting re quest . 2. Enter the names of the re qu ired participants. To add names from your contacts list , enter the firs t few characters, and select from the proposed m atches. To add optional part icipants, select Options > Add optional particip ants . 3. Enter the subject . 4. Enter the start and end times an d dates, or select All- day event . 5. Enter the location. 6. Set an alarm for the entry, if needed. 7. For a recurring meeting, se t the recurrence time, and enter the end date. 8. Enter a description. To set the priority for th e meeting request, select Options > Priority . To send the meeting request, select Options > Send . Calendar views Select Menu > Calendar . You can switc h between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and the calen dar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events fo r the selected day grouped into time slots accordin g to their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the even ts for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Options > Change view and the desired view. Tip: To open the week vi ew, select the week number. To move to the next or the previous day in month, week, day, and agenda view, select the desired day. To change the default view, select Options > Settings > Default view . Contacts About Contacts Select Menu > Contacts . With Contacts, yo u can save and update contact information, such as phon e numbers, home addresses, and e-mail addresses of your contacts. Y ou can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbna il image to a contact. You can also create contact group s, which allow you to communicate with several con tacts at the same time, and send contact information to compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. 27 Your Nokia E 72
Work with contacts Select Menu > Contacts . To create a contact, select Options > New contact , and enter the details of the contact. To copy contacts from the memory card, i f available, select Options > Create backup > Memory card to phone . To search for contacts, start enteri ng the contact's name in the search field. Create contact groups Select Menu > Contacts . 1. To create a contact group, scroll to each contact you want to add to t he group, and select Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark . 2. Sele ct Options > Group > Add to group > Cre ate new group , and enter a name for the group. If you wan t to make con ference calls to th e group us ing a conference service, define the following: ⢠Conf. service number â Enter the conference call service number. ⢠Conf. service ID â Enter the conference call ID. ⢠Conf. service PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code. To make a conference call to the group using the conference service, se lect the group, scroll right, an d select Call conf. service . Search for contacts in a remote databa se To activate remote contact search, select Optio ns > Settings > Contacts > Remote search server . You must define a remote server before you can do remote contact s earches. To search for contacts in a remote database, select Contacts > Options > Search from remote . Enter the name of the contact you want to search for, a nd select Search . The device establishe s a data connection to the remote d atabase. To search for contacts in th e home screen, start entering characters in the home screen, and select the database from the proposed matches. To change th e remote contac ts database, s elect Options > Settings > Contacts > Remote search server . This setting affects the database use d in the Contacts and Calendar applications and t he home screen, but not the database that is used for e-mail. Add ringing tones for co ntacts Select Menu > Contacts . To add a ringing tone for a contact, select the contact, Options > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. T he ringing tone sounds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for a contact group, select t he contact g roup, Options > Group > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. 28 Your Nokia E 72
To remove the ringing to ne, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Contacts settings Select Menu > Contacts . To edit the settings of t he Contacts application, select Options > Settings > Contacts and from the following: ⢠Contacts t o display â Show contacts that are stored in the device memory, on the SIM card, or both. ⢠Default saving memory â Select where to save contacts. ⢠Name disp lay â Change the way contacts' n ames are displayed. This setting is no t available for all languages. ⢠Default contact list â S e l e c t w h i c h c o n t a c t s l i s t o p e n s when you open the Contacts application. This setti ng is only available when there is more than one contacts list. ⢠Remote search ser ver â Change the remote con tacts database. This option is available only if remote contacts databases are supported by your service provider. Multitasking You can have several applicat ions open at the same time. To switch between acti ve applications, p ress and hold th e home key, scroll to an application, and press th e scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an acti ve phone call and want to check your calendar, press the home key to access the menu, an d open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, and open th e Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your message, press and hold the home key, scroll to the message and press the scroll key. Flashlight The camera flash can be used as a flashlight. To switch the flashlight on or off, in the ho me screen, press and hold the space bar. Do not point the flashlight at a nyone's eye. 29 Your Nokia E 72
Make calls Voice calls 1. In the home screen, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press the backspace key. For international calls, p ress ( replaces the international access code) , and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. The character as a replacement for the international access code may not work in all regions. In this case, en ter the international access code directly. 2. To make the call, press the call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt ), press the end key. Pressing the end key always en ds a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from the contacts list, select Menu > Contacts . Scroll to the desired na me, or enter the first letters or characters of the na me in the search field. To call the contact, press the call key . If you have saved sev eral numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press th e call key. Options during a call To adj ust th e v olu me dur in g a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You can also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute first. To send an image or a video in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in 3G networks only). You can edit the me ssage and change the recipien t before sending. Press the call key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Optio ns > Hold . To switch between the ac tive and the held call, select Options > Swap . To send touch tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send touch tones . Enter the touch tone string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pause charac ter (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add touch tones to the phone number or touch tone fields in a contact card. Tip: When you have only one activ e voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key again. During an acti ve call, to route the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudsp eaker . If you have a ttached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connect ivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate handsfree . To switch 30 Make calls
back to the ha ndset, select Options > Activate handset . To end an active call and replace it by answerin g the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that yo u can use during a voice call are network services. Voice mail Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application (network service) for the firs t time, you are asked to enter t he number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mailbox, scroll to Voice mailbox , and select Options > Call voice mailbox . To call your video mailbox, scroll to Video mailbox , and select Options > Call video mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, to call the mailbox, scroll to the mailbox, and select Options > Call internet call mbx. . To call your mailbox in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. Select the mailbox you want to call. To change the mai lbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. To mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call fo rwarding > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to fo rward calls, declining an incoming call also forwards the call. When you selec t Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message w ithout rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send message . To activate or deactivate rejecting calls with a text message, s elect Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Phone > Call > Decline call with m sg. . To edit the content of the message se nt to the caller, select Message text . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to the firs t participant. 2. To make a call to another p articipant, select Op tions > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3. When the new call is an swered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports confer ence calls 31 Make calls
between a maximum of six partici pants, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant , and select Private . The conference call is put o n hold on your device. The other participants can still continue the conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Conference to return to the conference call. To drop a participant, select Opt ions > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4. To end the active conferen ce call, press the end key. 1-touch dial a phone number To activate t he feature, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > 1-touch dialing . 1. To assign a phone number to one of the number keys (2-9), selec t Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > 1- touch . 2. Scroll to the key to which you want to ass ign the phone number, and select Opti ons > Assign . 1 is reserved for the voice or video mailbox. To call an assigned number, in the home screen, press the assigned key and then the call key. Call waiting You can answer a call while you h ave another call in progress. To activate ca ll wa iting (network service), select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Cal l > Call wait ing . To answer the waiting call, pr ess the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between th e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an acti ve call and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Optio ns > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Call forward Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Phone > Call forwarding . Forward incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select the type of calls to forward and from the following options: ⢠All voice calls or All fax calls â Forward all incoming voice or fax calls. You cann ot answer the calls, only forward the calls to another number. ⢠If busy â Forward incoming calls if you have an active call. ⢠If not answer ed â Forward incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the length of time for the device to ring before forwarding the call. 32 Make calls
⢠If out of reach â Forward calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Forward calls if you have an active call, do not answer, or the device is switched off or out of network coverage. To forward calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type, a forwarding option, and Options > A ctivate > To voice mailbox . To forward calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type, a forwarding option, and Options > Activate > To other number . Enter the number, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts. To check the current forwarding status, s croll to the forwarding option, and select Opt ions > Check stat us . To stop forwarding calls, scro ll to the forwarding option, and select Option s > Deactiv ate . Call restrictions Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Setti ngs and Phone > Call restriction . If you have defined internet call settings, select Internet call restrict ion . You can restrict the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To modify the settings, you need the restriction password from your service provider. Call restriction affe cts all call types. Select from the following v oice call restriction settings: ⢠Outgoing calls â Prevent making voice calls with your devic e. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Internat ional calls â Prev ent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls if roaming â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to hom e country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call restrictions, select the restriction option and Options > Check status . To deactivate all voice call rest rictions, selec t a restriction option and Options > Deact. all restrictions . To change the password used for restricting voice and fax calls, select Option s > Edit restrict ion passwd. . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The restriction password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not depend ent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so you do not need to record voice tags in advance. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in the contacts, and comp ares the spoken voice ta g to it . The voice recognition in the device adapts to the ma in userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name that is saved for the contact. To listen to the syn thesized voice tag, select a contact and Opti ons > Voice tag details . Scroll to a contact detail, and se lect Optio ns > Play voi ce tag . 33 Make calls
Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice di aling in all circumstances . When you use voice dialing, th e loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the right selection key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is atta ched, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialing. 2. A short tone sounds, and Speak now is d is p la ye d. S ay clearly the name that is saved for the contact. 3. The device plays a synthesi zed voice tag for the recognized contact, and displa ys the name and number. If you do not want to ca ll that contact, select another contact from the list of ma tches within 2.5 seconds, or, to cancel , select Quit . If several numbers are saved for a name, the device selects the default number, if defi ned. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number in a contact card. You can also say the name and telephone nu mber type, such as cellular or home. Make a video call When you make a video call (n etwork service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you an d the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recip ient . T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h a v e a U S I M c a r d and be in the coverage of a 3G net work. For availability of and subscription to video call services, cont act your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. indicates that you have denied video sending from your device. To send an image instead, select Menu > Ct rl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a vide o call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video call, enter the ph one number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Sele ct Opti ons > Call > Video ca ll . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video imag e is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a n ormal call or send a text or mu ltimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background grap hic. 34 Make calls
3. To end the video call, press the end key. Options during a video call To change between showing vi deo or hearing only sound, select Options > Enable , or Di sable and the desired option. To use the main camera to send video, select Op tions > Use main camera . To switch back to the secondary camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To take a snapshot of the vi deo you are sending, select Options > S end snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the re cipient. The snapshot is not saved. Press Cancel to resume sending video. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To route the au dio to a comp atible headset with Bluetooth connectivity attached to your device, select Option s > Activate handsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Options > Activate handset . To change the video quality, select Options > Video preference . Normal qu ality is framerate 10 fps. Use Clearer detail for small, static details. Use Smoother motion for moving i mages. To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow video image to be sen t to caller? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you on ly hear the sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen wi th a still image captured by the camera in you r device, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phone > Call > Im age in video call . To end the video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use video sharing (ne twork service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate video sha ring. If you do not want to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a comp atible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to hig h volume may damage your hearin g. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. 35 Make calls
Video sharing requirements Video sharing requires a 3G connection. For more information on the service, 3G network availability, and fees associated with usin g this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. ⢠Ensure you have an active 3G connection and are within 3G network coverage. If y ou move ou tside the 3G network during a video s h aring session, the sharing stops while your voi ce call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recip ient are registered to the 3G networ k. If you invite someone to a sharing session and t he recipientâÂÂs device is not within 3G netw ork coverage, does not hav e video sharing installed, or person -to-person connections set up, the recipient does no t receive invitations. You receive an error message that indicate s that the recipient cannot accept the invitation . Settings To set up video sharing, yo u need person-to-person and 3G connection settings. Person-to- person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a contact card: 1. Sele ct > Contacts . 2. Open the contact card (or start a n ew card for that person). 3. Sele ct Opti ons > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@ domainnam e (you can us e an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do n ot know the S IP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). 3G connection settings To set up your 3G connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the 3G network. ⢠Ensure that your device 3G access poin t connection settings are configured properly. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1. To share live video during the call, select Live vid eo . To share a video clip, select Video clip and the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If your device notifies you 36 Make calls
that the video c lip must be converted, select OK . Your device must have a video ed itor for the conversion t o work. 2. If the recipient has seve ral SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code saved in the contacts list, select the desired a ddress or number. If the SIP address or phone numb er of the recipient is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send th e invitation. Your device sends the in vitation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automatica lly when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing Zoom the video (available for sender only). Adjust the brightness (available for sender only). or Mu te or unmute the microp hone. or Turn the loudspeaker on and off. or Pause and resume video sharing. Switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only). 3. To end the sharing session, select St op . To end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you sh ared, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the memory location of the saved video. To define the preferred memor y location, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Video sharing > Preferred saving memory . If you access oth er applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paus ed. To return to the video sharing view, and to cont inue sharing, in the home screen, select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone se nds you a video sharing i nvitation, the invitation messag e displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it ri ngs when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invita tion and you are not within UMTS network cov erage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: ⢠Yes â Accep t the invitation, and a ctivate the sharing session. ⢠No â Reject the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can also press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To mute the vid eo on your device, select Optio ns > Mute . To play the video at the original volume, select Options > Original volume . This does not affect the audio playback of the other party of the phone call. To end the sharing session, se lect Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you end the call, also video sharing ends. 37 Make calls
Log The log stores inform ation about the communication history of the device. The device regis ters missed and received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions , the device is switched on, an d within the netw ork service area. Recent calls Select Menu > Log and Recent calls . To view missed, received, and dialed calls, select Missed calls , Received call s or Dialed numbers . Tip: To open the dialed numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠Save to Cont acts â Save the highlighted pho ne number from a recent calls list to your contacts. ⢠Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. ⢠Delete â Clear a hi ghlighted ev ent in the selected list. ⢠Settings â S e l e c t Log duration an d the length of tim e that the communica tion inform ation is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Log . To view the approximate durati on of your last call, and dialled and received calls, select Call timers . Packet data Select Menu > Log . You may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. To ch eck the amount of data sent or re ceived during packet data connections, select Packet data > All sent data or All received data . To clear both sent and received information, select Options > Clear counters . You need the lock code to clear the information. Monitor all communicat ion events Select Menu > Log . To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireles s LAN connections registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text messa ge sent in mo re than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Co nnections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging center or web pages are sho wn as packet data connections. To view how much data was tra nsferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View . To copy a ph one number from the log to the clipboard, a nd paste it into a text message, for example, select Options > Use number > Copy . 38 Make calls
To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To set the log duration, select Options > Sett ings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register and messagi ng delivery reports are permanently deleted. 39 Make calls
Messaging Select Menu > Messaging . In Messag ing (network servic e), you can send and receive text messages, multimedia messages , audio messages, and e-mail messages. You can also receive web service messages, cell broadcast m essages, an d special mes sages containing data, and send service commands. Before sending or receivin g messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network su pports the messaging features you want to use and that they are a ctivated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access poin t settings on the device. ⢠Define the e-mail account sett ings on the device. ⢠Define the text mes sage settings on the device. ⢠Define the multimedia message settings on the device. The device may recognize the SIM car d provider and automati cally configu re some of the mes sage settings . If not, you may need to define the sett ings manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Select Menu > Messaging . Messages and data received using Bluetooth connectivity are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox folder. Messages that you have been writing can be stored in th e Drafts folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in the Outbox folder, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and mu ltimedia messages you have sent (network service), s elect Options > Settings > Text message > Receive report or Multimedia message > Receive reports . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Organize messages Select Menu > Messaging and My folders . To create a new folder to or ganize your messages, select Options > New folder . 40 Messaging
To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folde r . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to anothe r folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Options > Sort by . To view the properties of a message, select the message and Options > Message details . E-mail service The e-mail service automatica lly pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E72 . You can read, respond to, and or ganize your e-mail on the go. The e-mail service works wi th a number of internet e- mail providers that are ofte n used for personal e-mail. This service must be suppor ted by your network and may not be available in all count ries or regions. For availability, contact your service provider. Set up e-mail on yo ur device 1. Select Menu > Email > New mai lb. . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. If requested, allow your device to connect to the inter net. 4. Select your e-mail service provider or account type. 5. Enter the required account details, such a s e-mail address and password. The e-mail service ca n run on your device even if y ou have installed other e-mail applic ations, such as Mail for Exchange. E-mail Set up your e-mail With the Nokia e-mail wizard, you can set up your corporate e-mail account, such as Microsoft Outlook, Mail for Exchange, or Intellisync , and your internet e-mail account. When setting up your corporate e-mail, you may be prompted for the name of the server associated with your e-mail address. For deta ils, contact your comp any IT department. 1. To open the wizard, in the home screen, select Set up e-mail . 2. Enter your e-mail address and password. If the wizard is not able to configure your e-mail settings automatica lly, you need to se lect your e-mail account type, and enter the related account se ttings. If your device contains any additional e-mail clients, those are offered to you when you open the wizard. Send e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . 1. Select your mailbox and Options > Create email . 2. In the To field, enter the recipient's e-mail address. If the recipient's e-mail addre ss can be found in Contacts, 41 Messaging
start entering the recipien t's name, and select the recipient from the proposed matches. If you add several recip ients, insert ; to separa te the e-mail addresses. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. If the Bcc field is not visible, selec t Option s > More > Show Bcc field . 3. In the Subject field, ente r the subject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your message i n the text area. 5. Sele ct Options and from the following: ⢠Add attachment â Add an at tachment to the message. ⢠Priority â Set the priority of the message. ⢠Flag â Flag the message for follow-up. ⢠Insert te mplate â Insert text from a template. ⢠Add recipient â Add recipients to the message from Contacts. ⢠Editing options â Cut, copy, or paste the selected text. ⢠Input options â Activate or deactivate predictive text input, or select the wri ting language. 6. Sele ct Options > Send . Available opt ions may vary . Add attachments Select Menu > Messaging . To write an e-mail message, select your mailbox and Options > Create email . To add an attachment to the e-mai l message, select Options > Add attachment . To remove the selected attachmen t, select Options > Remove attachmen t . Read e-mail Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail mess age, select the mai lbox, and select the message from the list. To reply to the message sender, select Options > Reply . To reply to the sender and all other recipients, select Options > Reply to all . To forward the message, select Options > Forward . Download attachments Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To view the attachments in a received e-mail message, scroll to th e attachment field, and select Options > Actions . If there is one attachme nt in the message, se lect Open to open the attachm ent . If there are several attachments, select View list to see a list showing which attachments have been downloaded. To download the selected attachment or all the attachments from the list to your device, select O ptions > Actions > Download or Download al l . The attachmen ts are not saved in your device, and are deleted when yo u delete the mes sage. 42 Messaging
To save the selected att achment or all the downloaded attachments in your device, select Optio ns > Action s > Save or Save all . To open the selected, down loaded attachment, select Options > Actions > Ope n . Reply to a meeting reques t Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. Select a received meeting request, Options , and from the following: ⢠Accept â Accept the meeting request. ⢠Declin e â Decline the meeting request. ⢠Forward â Forward the meetin g request to another recip ient . ⢠Remove from calendar â Remove a canceled meeting from your calendar. Search for e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To search for items within the recipients, subjects, and body texts of the e-mail messages in the mailbox, select Options > Search . To stop the search, select Optio ns > Stop search . To start a new se arch, select Options > New search . Delete e-mails Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete an e-mail messa ge, select the messag e and Options > Actions > Delete . The message is placed in the Deleted items folder, if avai lable. If there is no Deleted items folder available, the message is deleted permanently. To empty the Deleted items fo lder, select the folder and Options > Empty deleted it ems . Switch between e-mail folders Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To open another e-mail folder or mailbox, select Inbox at the top of the display. Select the e-mail folder or mailbox from the list. Disconnect from the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To cancel the synchronization between the device and the e-mail server, an d to work with e-mail withou t a wireless connection, select Options > Disconne ct . If your mailbox does not have the Disconnect option, sele ct Options > Exit to disconnect from the mailbox. To start the synchron ization again, select Options > Connect . Set an out-of-office reply Select Menu > Email . 43 Messaging
To set an out-of-office reply, if available, select your mailbox and Options > Settings > Mailbox > Out of office > On . To enter the text for the reply, select Out of offi ce reply . General e-mail settings Select Menu > Email and Settings > Global settings . Select from the following: ⢠Message list layout â Select whether the e-mail messages in Inbox display one or two lines of text. ⢠Body text preview â Preview messages when scrolling through the list of e -mail messages in Inbox. ⢠Title dividers â T o b e a b l e t o e x p a n d a n d c o l l a p s e t h e list of e-mail messages, select On . ⢠Download notifi cations â Set the device to display a notification when an e-mail a ttachment has been downloaded. ⢠Warn before delete â Set the device to display a warning before you delete an e-mail message. ⢠Home screen â Define how many lin es of e-mail are displayed in the home sc reen information area. Message reader With Message reader you can listen to te xt, multimedia, audio, and e-mai l messages. To listen to new message s or e-mail, in the home screen, press and hold the left sele ction key until Message reader opens . To listen to a message from your Inbox, scroll to the message, and sele ct Options > Listen . To listen to an e- mail message from your mail box, scroll to the message, and select Option s > List en . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the re ading, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message, scroll right. To replay the current message or e-mail, scroll left. To skip to the previous message, scroll left at the beginnin g of the message. To view the current message or e-mail in text format without the sound, select O ptions > View . Speech Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Speech . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message r eader, select Language . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . When you download a new language, you must download at least one voice fo r that language. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the s peaking rate, select Speed . To set the speakin g volume, select Volume . To view the details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voice . 44 Messaging
To delete languages or voices, select the item and Options > Delete . Text and multimedia messages Select Menu > Messaging . Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display mult imedia messages. T he appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. A multimedia message (MMS) ca n contain text and objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your device, you must define the multimedia mes sage settings. Your device may recognize the SIM card provider and configure the correct multimedia message settings automatically. If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings , order the settings from your servic e provider in a configuration message, or use the Settin gs wizard application. Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may contai n malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail message that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to res end it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to resend t he e-mail may increase your data tran sfer costs. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a messag e, or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Select New message > Mess age to send a text or multimedia message (MMS), Audio message to send a multimedia message that i ncludes one sound clip, or E-mail to send an e-mail message. 2. In the To field, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from the contacts list, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. You can also copy and paste the number or a ddress from the clipboard. 3. In the subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visi ble, select Optio ns > Message header fields . 4. In the message field, writ e the message. To insert a template or note, select Options > Insert content > Insert text > Template or Note . 5. To add a media file to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert content , the file type or sou rce, and the desired file. To in sert a business card, slide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Insert conte nt > Insert other . 6. To capture an image or record a video or sound clip for a multimedia me ssage, select Op tions > Insert 45 Messaging
content > Insert image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert sound clip > New . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Optio ns and the attachment type. E-mail att achments are indica ted by . 8. To send the message, se lect Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination. Your device supports tex t messages be yond the limit for a single message . Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more spa ce, and limit the number of characters that can be se nt in a single me ssage. You may not be able to send video clips th at are saved in the MP4 file format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > SIM messages . T e x t m e s s a g e s m a y b e s t o r e d o n y o u r S I M c a r d . B e f o r e y o u can view SIM message s, you must copy the message s to a folder in the device. After copy ing the messages to a folder, you can view them in the fold er or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Sele ct Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Sele ct Opti ons > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM car d messages, open the folder where you copied the me ssages, and op en a message. Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Reply . 2. Sele ct To sende r to reply to the sender, To all to reply to everyone included in the received message, Via audio message to reply with an audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. E -mail message is available only if a mailbox is confi gured and the message is sent from an e-mail ad dress. 3. Enter the t ext of the mess age, and select Options > Send . Create presentations Select Menu > Messaging . 46 Messaging
Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if MMS creati on mode is set to Restricted . To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia m essage > MMS creation mode > Free or Guided . 1. To create a presentation, select New me ssage > Message . The message type is changed to multimedia message based on th e inserted content. 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from the contac ts list. If you enter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Option s > Insert co ntent > Insert presentation and a presentation template. A template may defin e which media obj ects you can include in the presentation , where they appear, and which effects are displa yed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area, an d enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound or video clips, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Options > In sert . 6. To add slides, select Options > Insert > New slide . To select the background color for the presentation and background images for different slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects betwe en im ages or slides, select Op tions > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Optio ns > Preview . Multimedia presentations may only be viewed in compatible devices tha t support presentations. They may appear different in different devices. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the presentation, select Opt ions > Continue . If the text or images are t oo large to fit on the display, select Option s > Activate scrolling , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone num bers and e-ma il or w eb addresses in the presentation, select Option s > Find . You ma y use these numbers and addresse s to make calls, send messag es, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia message s as complete presentations, open the message , and select Options > Play presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia messa ge, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play video clip . To view the name and size of an attachment, select the message and Op tions > Obj ects . To save a multimed ia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . 47 Messaging
Special message types Select Menu > Messaging . You can receive special messages th at contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account se ttings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications such as news hea dlines, services, or links throug h which the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message settings, select Opt ions > Settings > Service message . To download the service or message content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other details of the mes sage before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send servic e commands You can send a service reque st message (also kn own as a USSD command) to your serv ice provider and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service request message, select Op tions > Service commands . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast networ k service, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic cond itions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topi c numbers, contact your service provider. Cell br oadcast messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to turn cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related to a topic, select the t opic. To receive messages rela ted to a topic, select Opti ons > Subscribe . Tip: You can set import ant topics as h ot topics. You are notified in the home screen, when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic and Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Option s > Topic . 48 Messaging
Messaging settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs . Open the message type in qu estion, and define all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognize the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, and GPRS settings automa tically. If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centers â View the available message centers for your device, or add a new one. ⢠Message center in use â Select a message center to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Reduce d support to use automatic cha racter conversion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network service). ⢠Message validity â Select how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient cannot be reached within the validity period, the mes sage is deleted from the message center. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to an other format. Change this option on ly if you are sure that your message center is able to convert text messages into these other formats. For more information, contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your devic e. ⢠Reply via same center â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message center number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > Multimedia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Scale image s in multimedia messages. ⢠MMS creati on mode â Sele ct Restrict ed to set your device to prevent you from including content in multimedia messages tha t may not be supported by the network or the receiving de vice. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message wi th no restrictions on attachment type, select Fre e . If you select Restrict ed , creating multimedia pres entations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge center. You may not be able to change the default access p oint if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimedia retri eval â Select how you wa nt to receive messages, if available. Select Always automatic to receive multimedia messages always 49 Messaging
automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multim edia message that you can retrieve from the message center (for example, when you are traveling abroad and are outside y our home network), Manual to retrieve multi media messages from the message center manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimed ia messages. A utomatic retrieval may not be su pported in all regions. ⢠Allow anonymous ms gs. â Receive messages from unknown senders. ⢠Receive ads â Receiv e messages de fined as advertisements. ⢠Receive reports â R equest for delivery and read reports of sent message s (n etwork service). Receiving a delivery report of a mu ltimedia message that ha s been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to no t send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging center tries to send the me ssage (network service). If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging center. Maxi mum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. The device requires network support to indicat e that a sent message has been received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstan ces, this information may not always be reliable. Service message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Service mess age . To allow your device to receiv e service messages from your service provider, select Service mess ages > On . To select how to download services and service message content , select Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If you select Automatically , you may sti ll need to confirm some downloads since not a ll services can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Cell broadcast . To receive cell broadc ast messages, select Reception > On . To select the la nguages in which y ou want to receiv e cell broadcast message s, select Lang uage . To display new topics in the ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Other . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent messages â Selec t whether to save sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Number of saved msgs. â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. 50 Messaging
⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your m essages. You can save messages to th e memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder v iew â Select if you want to see folder information on one or two lines. About Chat With IM (network service) , you can exchange instan t messages wi th your friends. You can access sev eral chat services or communities simultaneously and s witch between them. If you want to , for example, browse the web, you can leave the I M application to run in the background, and still be notified of new instant messages. The IM application is preinsta lled on your device. To start chatting, select Menu > Applicatio ns > Chat . Using network services and downloadi ng content to you r device may result in data traffic costs. 51 Messaging
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GP RS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UM TS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data conn ection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a Wi-Fi/WLAN data connection. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use the s ame internet access point. To establish a data connect ion, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of access points, such as the following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network settings Your device can automatically swit ch between GSM and 3G networks. T he GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The 3G network is indicated with . Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Phone > Network and from the following: ⢠Network mode â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or 3G network automatically , according to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. For details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. A roaming agreem ent is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. ⢠Operato r selectio n â Select Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connect ion to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a ne tw ork. The selected network must have a r oaming agreement with your hom e cellular network. ⢠Cell info display â Set the device to indica te when it is used in a cellular netw ork based on microcellular 52 Connectivity
network (MCN) technology and t o activate cell info reception. Wi-Fi/WLAN connection Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WLA N, you can connec t your device to the int ernet and compatible dev ices that have WLAN suppo rt. About WLAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WLA N, you can connec t your device to the internet a nd compatible devices that support WLAN. To use a WLAN connection, you need the following: ⢠WLAN must be available in your location. ⢠Your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and yo u need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. ⢠An internet a ccess point created for WLA N. Use the access point for applications th at need to connect t o the internet. A WLAN conne ction is established when you create a data connection using a W LAN internet acces s point. Th e active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can us e WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but se veral applications can use the same internet access point. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to ru n in the background while using other feat ures, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g standard ⢠Operation at 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi protected access (WPA/WPA2), a nd 802.1x authentica tion methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to incr ease the security of your wireless LAN conne ction. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use a WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. Note: Using Wi-Fi may be restricted in some countries. For example, in Fr ance, you are only allowed to use Wi-Fi indoors. For more information, contact your loc al authorities. 53 Connectivity
WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you mu st create an internet access point (I AP) for WLAN. Use the access point for applications that n eed to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN inte rnet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can us e WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applicati ons can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offli ne profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN con nection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the ho me screen. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a wireless LAN (WLAN) and manage your WL AN connections. If the search finds WLANs, to creat e an internet access point (IAP) for a connection an d start the web browser using this IAP, select the connection and Start web browsing . If you select a secured WLAN , you are asked to enter the relevant password. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). If you already have the web browser runn ing using the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Cont. web browsing . To end th e active connection, select the connection and Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. and Options . Select from the following: ⢠Filter WLAN netwo rks â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networks. The selected networks a re not displayed t he next time th e application searches for WLANs. ⢠Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active connection, th e connection details are displayed. Operating modes There are two operating modes in Wi-Fi WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operat ing mode allows two kinds of communicat ion: wireless devic es are connected to each other through a Wi-F i/WLAN access point device, or wireless devices are connec te d to a wired LAN th rough a Wi-Fi/WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly with each other. 54 Connectivity
WLAN settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a wireless LAN (WLAN) availa ble in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for availa ble WLANs, and to update the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not av ailable unless you s elect Show WLAN availabi lity > Yes . To set the device to test the internet capability of t he selected WLAN automa tically, to ask for permission every time, or to never perform th e connectivity test, select Internet connectivity te st > Run automatically , Ask every time , or Never run . If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when th e device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to internet destinations. To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#6220952 6# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. Active data connections Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . Select Active data connections . In the active data connections view, you can see the open data connect ions: packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Option s > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . Sync Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Sync . Sync enables you to synchroniz e your notes, calendar entries, text and multim edia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronizat ion settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronization profile con tai ns the necessary settings for synchronization. When you open the Sync application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark t o leave it out. To manage sync profiles, select Options and the desired option. 55 Connectivity
To synchronize data, select Optio ns > Synchronize . To cancel synchronizati on befo re it finishes, select Cancel . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth connectivity With Bluetooth connect ivity , you can make a wireless connection to other compatib le devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets, and car kits. You can use the connection to send images, video and sound clips, and notes, tran sfer files from your com patible PC, and print im ages with a comp atible printer. Since devices with B luetooth wireless technology communicate usin g radio waves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. Howe ver, they mus t be within 10 meters (33 feet) of each ot her, although the conn ection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: Advanced Aud io Distribution, Audio Video Remote Control, Basic Imaging, Basic Printing, Dial-u p Networking, File Transfer, Generic Access, Hands-free, Hea dset, Human Interface De vice, Object Push, Phone Book Access, SIM Access, Serial Port. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the ma nufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Features using Bluetooth technology increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, only connections to authorized devices are possible. Settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Blueto oth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can chan ge the name later. Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. ⢠My phone's visibility â To allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetoo th wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period after which th e visibility is set from shown to hidden , select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . ⢠My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wi reless technology. ⢠Remote SIM mod e â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit accessory, to use the SIM card in your device to conn ect to the network. Security tips Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Blueto oth . 56 Connectivity
When you are not using Bluetooth conn ectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidde n . Operating the device in hi dden mode is a safer way to avoid malicious software. Do not accept Bluetooth connectivity from sources you do not trust. Alternatively, switch off the Bluetooth func tion. This does not affect other functions of the device. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This protects your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connecti ons ca n be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the application where the item you want to send is store d. 2. Scroll to an item, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices using Bluet ooth technology w ithin range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt th e search, select Cancel . 3. Select the device wi th which you wa nt to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you a re asked to enter a passcode. The same passcode must b e entered in both devic es. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed . Pair devices To pair with compatible dev ices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1 to 16 digits) and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not ha ve a user interfa ce have a factory-set passcode . The pa sscode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices that are within range are displayed. 2. Select the device, and en ter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as w ell. 3. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancement, and s elect Opt ions > Connect to audio de vice . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as a uthorized or unauthorized, scroll to the device, and select from the following options: ⢠Set as authorized â Connections between your device and the au thorized de vice can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or 57 Connectivity
authorization is needed. Use this status for your ow n devices, such as your compat ible headset, PC or devices that belong to someone you trust. indica tes authorized devices in th e paired devices view. ⢠Set as unauthorized â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairin gs, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data through Bluetooth conn ectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you w ant to accept the message . If you accep t, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messag ing. Messa ges rece ived through Bluetooth connectivity a re indicated by . Tip: If your device notifies you that the memory i s full when you try to receive data th rough Bluetooth connectivity, change memo ry card as the memory where the data is stored. Block devices Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Blueto oth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Paired devic es tab. Scroll to a device you want to block, and select Opt ions > Block . To unblock a device, open the Blocked devices tab, scroll to a device, and select Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Dele te all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want t o block a ll future connec tion requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paire d and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode and set the other device as authorized. To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, activate Bluetooth con nectivity and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator ar ea, and you cannot use SI M card serv ices or features requiring cellular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conne cted enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode, ex cept to the emergency numbers programm ed into your device. To 58 Connectivity
make calls from your device , you must leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . Data cable To avoid corrupting data, do not disconnect the USB data cable during da ta transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card in your device, and connect the device to a compatible PC with the data cable. 2. When the device asks which mode to use, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. End the connection from the computer (from the Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Microso ft Windows, for example) to avoid damag ing the memory card. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect the data cable, and select PC Suite . To synchronize the music in your device with Nokia Ovi Player, install the Nokia O vi Player software on your PC, connect the data cable, and select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you n ormally use with the dat a cable, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode , and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the data cable to the devi ce, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivi ty > USB and Ask on connection > Yes . PC connections You can use your mobile device with a variety of compatible PC connectiv ity and data communica tions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exampl e, transfer files and im ages between your device and a compatible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Suite . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) and certified by the Di gital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). You can use a wireless L AN (WLAN) acce ss point device or router to create a home netw ork. Then you can connect compatible WLAN-ena bled UPnP devices to the network. Compatible devices may be your mobile device, a compatible PC, a sound system, a television, or a compatible wireless multimedi a receiver connected to a sound system or telev ision. You can share and synchron ize media files in your mobile device with other compatible UPnP and DLNA certified devices using the home ne twork. To activate the home network functionality and ma nage the settings, select 59 Connectivity
Menu > Applica tions > Home media . You can also use the Home media application to view and play media files from home network devices on your device or on other compatible devices su ch as a PC, sound syste m, or television. To view your media files on anoth er home network device, in Photos, for exampl e, select a file, Options > Show vi a home netw ork , and the device. To use the WLAN function of your device in a home network, you must have a working W LAN home connection and have other UPnP enabled home devices connected to the same home network. After setting up your home network, you can shar e your photos and video clips with your friends and family at home. You ar e also able to store y our media to a media server or retrieve media files from a compatible home server. You can play music stored in your device using a DLNA certified home stereo system, controlling the playlists and volume levels di r ectly from your device. You can also view images captur ed with the camera of your device on a compatible TV sc reen, all controlled with your devic e over WLAN . The home network uses the security setti ngs of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feature in a WLAN infrastructure network with a WLAN access point dev ice and encryption enabled. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection reques t from another compatible device, or select the option to vie w or play, or copy media files on your device, or search for other devices. 60 Connectivity
Internet With the web browser, you can view web pages on the internet. You can also browse web pages tha t are designed specifically for cellular phones. To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Using the web browser requires network support. Browse the web With the Brow ser application , you can browse web pages. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Shortcut: To o pe n B r o w se r , p r es s a n d ho l d 0 in the home screen. Go to a web p age â In the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or start entering a web address (the field opens automatically), and select Go to . Some web pages may contai n material, such as videos , that requires a larg e amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory whi le loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Othe rwise, the videos are not displayed. Disable graphics to save memory and speed up downloadin g â Select Options > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . Refresh the co ntent of the web page â Select Options > Web page options > Reload . View snapshots of web page s you have visited â Select Back . A list of pages y ou have visited during th e current brow sing session opens. This option is available if History list is activated in the browser se ttings. Block or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows â Select Options > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . View the sho rtcut keys â Select Options > Keypad shortcuts . To edit the shortcut keys, select Edit . Zoom into or out of the web p age. â Press * or # . Tip: To go to the home screen without exiting the Browser application or closing the connection, press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. Open the t oolbar â Press and hold the scroll key on a blank area of a web pag e. Move within the toolbar â Scroll left or right. Select a feature from the t oolbar â Press t he scroll key From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: ⢠Go to web address â Enter a web address. ⢠Recently visited page s â View a list of the web addresses you visit frequently. 61 Internet
⢠Bookmarks â Open the bookmarks view. ⢠Full screen â View the web page in full screen. ⢠Page overvi ew â Display an overview of the current web page. ⢠Search by keyword â Search the current web page. ⢠Settings â Edit the web browser settings. Navigate pages When you are browsing a large web page, you can use Mini Map or Page overview to vi ew the page at one glance. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Activate the Mini Map â Selec t Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . When you scroll thr ough a large web page, the Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the page. Move on the Mini Map â Scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired locat ion, stop scrolling. The Mi ni Map disappears and leaves yo u at the selected location. Find information on a web page with Page overview 1. Press 8 . A miniature image of the current web page opens. 2. Move on the miniature im age by scrolling up, down, left, or right. 3. When you find a se ction you want to view, select OK to go to that section on the web page. Web feeds and blogs With web feeds, you can easi ly follow news headlines and your favorite blogs. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages. They are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages . The browser application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. Subscribe to a web feed when a feed is available on the page â Select Options > Subscribe to web feeds . Update a web feed â In the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > W eb feed opti ons > Refres h . Set automatic upda te for all web fe eds â In the Web feeds view, select Options > Edit > Edit . This option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Content search With keyword search, you can quickly find the information you are looking for on a web page. Select Menu > Internet > Web . Search for text within the current w eb page â Select Options > Find keyword . To view the previous or next month, s croll up or down. Tip: To search for text within the current web p age, press 2 . 62 Internet
Bookmarks You can store your favorite web pages in Bookmarks for instant access . Select Menu > Internet > Web . Access bookmarks 1. If you have a page othe r than Bookmarks as y our homepage, select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . 2. Select a web address from the list or from the collection of bookmarks in the Recent ly visited pages folder. Save the current web page as a bookmark â While browsing, select Optio ns > Web page options > Save as bookmark . Edit or delete boo kmarks â S elect Op tions > Bookmark manager . Send or add a bookm ark, or set a b ookmarked web page as the homepage â Select Options > Bookmark options . Empty the cache Emptying the cache memory helps you keep your data secure. The information or se rvices you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. If you have accessed or tried to acce ss confidential information requir ing pas sword s, emp ty th e cache after each browsing session. Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the connection End the connection and close the Browser application â Selec t Option s > Exit . Delete cookies â Select Options > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Cookies contain information collected about your vi sits to web pages . Connection security With a secure connection and security certificates, you can safely browse the internet. If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the da ta transmission between the ga teway and the cont ent server (where the data is stored) is s ecure. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and so ftware installation consid erably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by 63 Internet
itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certific ates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "C ertificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. Web settings Select Menu > Internet > Web and Options > Settings and from the following: General settings ⢠Access point â C h a n g e t h e d e f a ult access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider. You may not be able to change, create, edit , or remo ve them. ⢠Homepage â Define the homepage. ⢠Mini map â Turn Mini Map on or off. Mini Map helps with web page navigation. ⢠History list â If y ou se l ec t On , while br owsing, to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current session, select Back . ⢠Web address suff ix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (f or example, .com or .org). ⢠Securi ty warn ings â Hide or show securi ty notification s. ⢠Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. ⢠Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifi cations. Page settings ⢠Load content â Select whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only , to load ima ges or objects later during browsing, select Opti ons > Display options > Load images . ⢠Default encoding â If text characters ar e not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language for the current page. ⢠Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. ⢠Automati c relo ad â Select whether y ou want the web pages to be refreshed a utomatically wh ile browsing. ⢠Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings ⢠Recently visited p ages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you wa nt to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pag es into the Recently visited pages folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, se lect H ide folder . ⢠Form data savi ng â Select whether you wa nt the password data or data you enter on different forms on a web page to be save d an d used the next time you open the page. ⢠Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings 64 Internet
⢠Acc. point for auto-update â Select the desired access point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automati c update s is active. ⢠Update wh en roaming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically when roamin g. 65 Internet
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools support wireless busines s and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit and view different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes or shopping lists. You can in s ert images, videos and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applica tions, such as Contacts , and send notes to ot hers. Create and edit notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, select the note and Options > Editing options . To add boldface, italics, or underli ning to your text or change the font color, press and hold the Shi ft key, and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, we b bookmarks, and files. ⢠Insert new â Add new items to the note. You can record sound and video cl ips, and capture images. ⢠Send â Send the note. ⢠Link note to call â S e l e c t Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The note is displayed wh en making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Menu > Office > Acti ve notes and Op tions > Settings . To select where to save notes , select Memory in use and the desired memory. To change the layout of active notes, or to view the notes as a list, select Change view > Grid or List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Ye s . Tip: If you temporarily do no t want to see notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have to rem ove the links between notes and contact cards. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en ter the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the 66 Nokia Office Tools
calculation and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the edit or field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the Calculator ap plication or switching off the device does not clear the memory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a c alculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager About File manager Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files. The available options may vary. To map or delete drives, or to define settings for a compatible remote driv e connected to your device , select Options > Remote driv es . Find and organize files Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Option s > Find . Select where to search, and enter a search te rm that matches the file name. To move or copy files and folders, o r to create new folders, select Options > Organize . Manage a memory card Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. ⢠Memory card password â P assword protect a memory card. ⢠Unlock memory card â Unlock a memory card. Quickoffice About Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quic kword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentation s, and Quic kmanager for p urchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 200 3, and 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, and PPT file formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the ed itor version of Quickoffice , you can also edit files. 67 Nokia Office Tools
Not all file formats or features are supported. Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements Select Menu > Office > Converter . 1. Scroll to the type field, and select Options > Conversion t ype t o o p e n a l i s t o f m e a s u r e s . S e l e c t t h e measurement type to use (other th an currency) and OK . 2. Scroll to the first unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which to convert and OK . Scroll to the next unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other amount field changes automatica lly to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate Select Menu > Office > Converter . When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all pr eviously set excha nge rates are cleared. Before you can make currency co nversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is al ways 1. The base cur rency determines the conversion ra tes of the other currencies. 1. To set the exchange rate for th e unit of currency, scroll to the type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type, an d enter the exchan ge rate you would like to set per single unit of currency . 3. To change the base curr ency , scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Sele ct Done > Yes to save the changes. After you have set all the ne cessary exchange rate s, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted files; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive pa ssword for protected archives; and change settings, such as co mpression level and file name encoding. You can save the archive files in t he device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . 68 Nokia Office Tools
With PDF reader, you can re ad PDF documents on th e display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Printing You can pr int documents, such as files, mess ages, images, or web pages, from your device. You may not be able t o print all types of docu ments. File printing Print files Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . Before printing, ensure that all the necessary configurations have been done to connect your device to the printer. Select Options > Printing options and from the following: ⢠Print â Print a document. To pri nt to a file, select Pri nt to file , and define the location for the file. ⢠Page set up â You can change the paper size and orientation, define the margin s, and insert a header or a footer. The maximum length of the header and footer is 128 characters. ⢠Preview â Preview the document before printing. Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing options > Print . Define the follo wing options: ⢠Printer â Select an availabl e printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of cop ies â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to fi le â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. The available options may vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Printers . To add a new printer, select Options > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the access point. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define th e host. ⢠User â En ter the user. ⢠Queue â En ter the print queue. ⢠Orient ation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media ty pe. ⢠Color mode â Select the color mode. ⢠Printer mo del â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. 69 Nokia Office Tools
Image print You can print images from your device using a printer compatible with Pict Bridge. Yo u can only prin t images that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, camera, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Option s > Print . Connect to printer Connect your device to a compatible printe r with a compatible data cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. To set your device to ask the purpose of th e connection each time the cable is connected, select Menu > Ctrl. panel and Connectivity > USB > Ask on conne ction > Yes . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. If the images do not fit on a single pag e, scroll up or down to display the additional p ages. Image print view After you select the images to print a nd the printer, define the printer settings. Select from the following: ⢠Layout â Select the layo ut for the images. ⢠Paper s ize â Select the paper size. ⢠Print quality â Select the print quality. Dictionary Select Menu > Office > Dictionary . To translate wo rds from one language to another, ent er text in the search field. As you en ter text, suggestions of words to translate are displayed. To transla te a word, select the word from the li st. All languages may not be supported. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Listen â Listen to the selected word. ⢠History â Find previously trans lated words from the current session. ⢠Langua ges â Change the source or target language, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dictionary. You cannot remove the English langua ge from the dictionary. You can have two additional langua ges inst alled, besides English. ⢠Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust the speed and volume of the voice. Notes Select Menu > Office > Note s . You can create and send notes to ot her compatible devices, and save received plai n text files (TXT file format) to Notes. To write a note, start entering the text. The note editor opens automa tically. To open a note, sele ct Open . 70 Nokia Office Tools
To send a note to other compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronize or to define synchronization settings for a note, select Options > Synchronization . Select Start to initialize synchronization or Se ttings to define the synchronization settings for the note. 71 Nokia Office Tools
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such a s GPS data to determine your location, or measure dista nces and coordinates. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordin ate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Sta tes government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Different positioning methods can be enabled or disabled in positioning settings. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports as sisted GPS (A-GPS). A-GPS requires network support. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection , which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informati on from an assista nce data serv er over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assist ance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. To disable the A-GPS service, select Menu > Applications > GPS data and Options > Positioni ng settings > Positioning me thods > Assisted G PS > Options > Disable . You must have an internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. The access point for A-GPS can be defined in posi tioning settings. A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for this service. 72 Positioning (GPS)
Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks you to select th e internet access point when GPS is used for the first time. Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your han d. Establishing a GPS conne ction may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using th e GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device ca nnot find the sate llite signal, con sider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover th e GPS antenna of you r devic e. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, th e signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tinted (at hermic) windows, which may block the satellite signa ls. Check satellite signal status To check how many sate llites your device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, select Menu > Applicatio ns > GPS data an d Options > Satellite stat us . If your device has found satellites, a bar for ea ch satellite is displayed in the satellite information view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal is. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal t o calculate the coordinates of your locati on, the bar color changes. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at leas t four satellites to be able to ca lculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial ca lculati on has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with th ree satellites. However, t he accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weat her or traffic conditions, based on th e location of your device. 73 Positioning (GPS)
When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reje ct to deny the reques t. Landmarks With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business , and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved lan dmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data. Select Menu > Applicatio ns > Landmarks . The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠New landmark â Create a ne w landmark . To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current posit ion . To select the location from the map, select Select from ma p . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . ⢠Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). ⢠Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each ca te gory to wh ich you want to add the landmark. ⢠Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, open the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categories . GPS data Route guidance Select Menu > Applications > GPS data an d Naviga tion . Start the route guidance outdoors. If started indoors, th e GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approximate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring . Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstac les on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacle s, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not ta ken into account when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destination, select Option s > Set destinatio n and a landmark as th e destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination se t for your trip, select Stop navigati on . Trip meter Select Menu > Applications > GPS data an d Trip distance . 74 Positioning (GPS)
The trip meter has limited a ccuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS s ignals. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS s ignal. To set the trip distance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation, select Options > Reset . To set the trip meter and total time to zero, select Restart . Positioning settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral > Positioning . Positioning methods Select from the following: ⢠Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. ⢠Assisted G PS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from an assista nce data server. ⢠Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluet ooth connectivity. ⢠Networ k based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point and positioning server for network-assisted positioning methods, such as assis ted GPS or network-based positioning, select Po sitionin g server . The positio ning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Notation settings To select wh ich measur ement system you want t o use for speeds and distan ces, select Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Coordinate format and the desired format. 75 Positioning (GPS)
Maps Maps overview Select Menu > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you what is nearby, helps you plan your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, streets, and services. ⢠Find your way with turn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronize your favorite loca tions and routes between your cellular phone and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather forecasts and other local information, if available. Note: Downloading content such as maps, s atellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of la rge amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be available in all countries, and may be provided only in sele cted languages. The services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as sate llite images, guides, weather and traffic information and rela ted services are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be inaccurate and incom plete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely s olely on the aforementioned content and related services. My position View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and br owse maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Maps and My posit ion . When the GPS connection is active, marks your current or last known location on the ma p. If the ic on' s c ol ors ar e faint, no GPS sign al is available. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon in dicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated areas. Move on the map â Use the scroll key. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location â Press 0 . Zoom in or o ut. â Press * or # . 76 Maps
If you browse to an area no t covered by maps that are stored on your device and you have an active data connection, new maps are automatica lly downloaded. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 â Selected location 2 â In dicato r area 3 â Point of interest (for ex ample, a railway station or a museum) 4 â Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different mode s, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Maps and My posit ion . Press 1 , and select from the following: ⢠Map â In the standard ma p view, details such as location names or highway nu mbers, are easy to read. ⢠Satellite â For a detailed view, use satellite images. ⢠Terrain â View at a glance the ground type, for example, when you ar e traveling off-road. Change between 2D and 3D views â Press 3 . Download and update maps To avoid cellular data transfe r costs, download the latest maps and voice guidance file s to your computer, and then transfer and sa ve them to your device. Use the Nokia Ovi Suite applic ation to download the latest maps and voice guidance files to your compatible computer. To download and install Nokia Ovi Suite on your compatible computer, go to www.ovi.com. Tip: Save new maps to your device before a journey, so you can browse the maps without an internet connection when trav eling abroad. To make sure your device does not use an internet connection, in the main menu, select Options > Settings > Internet > Connection > Offline . Use the compass If your device has a compass, when activated, both the arrow of the compass and the map rotate automatically in the direction to which the top of your device is pointing. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Activate the co mpass â Press 5 . 77 Maps
Deactivate the compass â Press 5 again. The ma p is oriented north. The compass is active when ther e is a green outline. If the compass needs calibration, the outline of the compass is red or yello w. To calibr ate the compass , rotate th e device around all axes in a continuou s movement. The compass has limited accuracy. Electromagnetic fields, metal objects, or other external circumstances may also affect the accuracy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. About positioning methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-ba sed navigation system used for calculating your location. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is a network service that improves t he speed and accuracy of the positioning. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define an internet ac cess point to download map information or use A-GPS. indicates the availability of the sa tellite signals. One bar is one satellite. When the device is searching for satellite signals, th e bar is yellow. When there is enough data available to calculate y our location, the bar turns green. The mo re green bars, the more reliable the location calculation. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by th e United States government and is subject to ch ange with the United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather condit ions. GPS signals may not be available inside b uildings or underground and may be impaired by materi als such as concrete and meta l. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely sole ly on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited a c curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS s ignals. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your cellular phone is currently connected to. Depending on the availa ble positioning method, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few meters to several kilometers. Find places Find a location Maps helps you find specific locations and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > Maps and Find places . 1. Enter search terms, such as a street address or postcode. To clear the search field, select Clear . 78 Maps
2. Select Go . 3. In the list of proposed matches, go to the desired item. To display the location on the map, select Map . To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, scroll up and down with the scroll key. Return to the list of propos ed matches â Selec t List . Search for different types of nearby places â Select Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or tran sport. If no search result s are found, ensure the spelling of your search terms is correct . Problems with your internet connection may also affect resu lts when searching online . To avoid data trans fer costs, you can a lso get search results without an active int ernet connection, if you ha ve maps of the searched area stored on your device. View location details View more information about a specific location or plac e, such as a hotel or r estaurant, if av ailable. Select Menu > Maps and My posit ion . View the detail s of a place â Select a place, press the scroll key, and select Show details . Manage places and routes Save places and routes Save addresses, places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Maps . Save a place 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. Press the scroll key. 4. Select Save place . Save a route 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. To add another route point, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 4. Select Add new route point and the appropriate option. 5. Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your save d places and routes â Select Favorites > Places or Routes . 79 Maps
View and organize places or routes Use your Favorites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes into a co llection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Maps and Favorites . View a saved place on the map 1. Sele ct Plac es . 2. Go to the place. 3. Sele ct Show on map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collection â Select Create new collection , and enter a collection name. Add a saved place to a collection 1. Sele ct Plac es and the place. 2. Sele ct Organize collections . 3. Sele ct New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete places or routes, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your friends When you want to share pl ace information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > Maps and My position Send a place to your fr iend's compatible d evice â Select a location, press the scroll key, and select Send . Synchronize your Favorites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronize the saved places, routes, and collections with your cellular phone, and access the plan on the go. To synchronize places, routes, or collections between your cellular phone and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. If you do not have one, in the main view, select Options > Account > Nokia account > Create new account . Synchronize saved place s, routes, and collections â Select Favorites > Synchronize with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia ac count, you are prompted to create one. You can set your device to synchronize you r Favorites automatically when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronize Favori tes automatically â Select Options > Settings > Synchronization > Change > At start-up and shut-d. . Synchronizing requires an acti ve internet connection, and may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. 80 Maps
Share location Publish your current location to Facebook, together w ith text and a picture. Your Fa cebook friends can see y our location on a map. Select Menu > Maps and Share location . To share your location , you need a Nokia account and a Facebook account. 1. Sign in to your Nokia account, or, if you do not yet have one, select Create new account . 2. Sign in to your Facebook account. 3. Select your current location. 4. Enter your status upda te. 5. To attach a pict ure to your post, select Add a photo . 6. Select Share location . Manage your Facebook a ccount â In the main view, select Options > Accou nt > Share location sett ings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of large amou nts of data and related data traffic costs. The Facebook terms of use ap ply to sharing your location on Facebook. Familiarize your self with the Facebook terms of use and the privacy practices. Before sharing your location to others, always consider carefully with whom you are sharing it. Check the privacy settings of the social networkin g service you are using as you might share your locati on with a large group of people. Drive and Walk Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available for your language, helps you find your way to a destination , leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk na vigation for th e first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance, and download the appro priate files. If you select a la nguage that inc ludes street names, also the street names are said al oud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice guidance language â In the main view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigati on > Drive guidanc e or Walk guidance and the appropriate option. Repeat the voice guidan ce for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Options > Repeat . Adjust the vo lume of the vo ice guidance for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Options > Volume . Drive to your destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you g et to your destinat ion. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination â Select Set destination and the appropriate option. 81 Maps
Drive to your h ome â Sel ect Drive home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define you r home location. To later change the home lo cation, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Home Location > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the center of the map as you move. Change views during navigation â Press the scroll key, and select 2D vi ew , 3D view , Arrow view , or Rout e overview . Obey all local laws. Always k eep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. Navigation view 1 â Route 2 â Your location and direction 3 â Compass 4 â Information bar (s peed, distance, time) Get traffic and safety information Enhance yo ur driving experience wi th real-time information about t raffic events, lane assist ance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . 82 Maps
View traffic ev ents on the map â During drive navigation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic informat ion â Select Optio ns > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid traffic events, such as tr affic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Reroute due to traffic . The location of speed came ras may be shown on your route during navigation, if th is feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not re sponsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using sp eed camera location data. Walk to your destination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centers. Select Menu > Maps and Walk . Walk to a destination â Select Set destinat ion and the appropriate opti on. Walk to your home â Select Walk home . When yo u select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the h ome lo cation, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Sett ings > Navigation > Home Lo cation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the center of the map as you move. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create your route and view it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Create a rout e 1. Go to your st arting point. 2. Press the scroll key, a nd select Add to ro ute . 3. To add another route point, select Add new rout e point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route poi nts 1. Go to a route point. 2. Press the scroll key, a nd select Move . 3. Go to the place where yo u want to m ove the route point to, and select OK . Edit the lo cation of a rout e point â Go to the route point, press the scroll key, and select Edit and the appropriate option. View the rou te on the map â Select Show route . Navigate to the destination â Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Start walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the na vigation guidance and th e way the route is displayed on the map. 83 Maps
1. In the route planner view, op en the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route pts. or Route point list . 2. Set the transportation mode to Drive or Walk . If yo u select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and pathway s an d routes th rough, for example, parks and shopping centers, can be used. 3. Select the desired option. Select the walking mode â Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indicates the walking direction. Use the faster or shor ter driving route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opt imized drivin g route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route sele ction > Optimized . The optimized driving route combines the advantages of both the shorter and the faster routes. You can also choose to allow or avoid using, for example, highways, toll roads, or ferries. Maps shortcuts General shortcuts To zoom in or out on the map, press * or # . To return to your cu rrent location, press 0 . To change the map type, press 1 . To tilt the map, press 2 or 8 . To rotate the map, press 4 or 6 . To return the map back to the north up posi tion, press 5 . Pedestrian navigation shortc uts To save a location, pres s 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To adjust the volume of the pedestrian navigation guidance, press 6 . To view the list of route points, press 7 . To adjust the map for night-tim e usage, press 8 . To view the dashboard, pr ess 9 . Car navigation shortcuts To adjust the map for daytime or ni ght-time usage, press 1 . To save the current location, press 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To repeat the voice guidance, press 4 . To find a different route, press 5 . To adjust the volume of voice guidance, press 6 . To add a stopover to the route, press 7 . To view traffic information, press 8 . To view the dashboard, pr ess 9 . 84 Maps
Personalization You can personalize your device by, for example, adjusting the various tones, background images, and screen savers. Profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . You can adjust and customiz e the ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. The active profile is shown at the top of the display in the home screen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , and define the settings. To customize a profile, select a profile and Options > Customize . To activate a profile, select a profi le and Options > Activate . To set the profile to be active until a certain t ime within the next 24 hou rs, scroll to the profile, select Options > Timed , and set the time. When the time expires, th e profile changes back to the previous ly active non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . Y ou cannot delete the predefined profiles. When the Offline profile is ac tivated, your connection to the cellular network is closed . All radio frequency signals between the device and the cellular network are prevented. If you try to send a message, it is placed in th e Outbox folder, and is sent only when another profile is activated. You can also use your device withou t a SIM card. If you remove the SIM card, the O ffline profile is activated. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. To make calls, you must firs t activate the phone function by changing profiles . If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you use the Offline profil e, you can still use a Wi-Fi network, for example, to read your mail or browse the internet. Yo u can also use Blu etooth connectivity . Remember to comply with any applica ble safety requirements when you es tablish and use Wi-Fi or Bluetooth connections. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Customize > Ringing tone . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a boo kmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading 85 Personalization
tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group only, select Options > Customize > Alert fo r , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. To change the message tone, select Options > Customize > Message alert tone . Customize profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Profiles . Select Optio ns > Customize and from the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringing tone tha t is a combination of the spoken name of the contac t and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you want the ringing ton e to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Selec t a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or message. ⢠Keypad tones â Select the volume level of the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Deactivat e the warning tones. This setting also affects th e tones of some ga mes and Java⢠applicati ons. ⢠Alert for â S et th e de vi ce t o r i ng o nl y u po n ca l ls fr o m phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠PTT call a lert tone â Select a ringing tone for PTT calls. ⢠Push to talk status â Set the PTT status to each profile. ⢠Profile na me â You can g ive a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The Normal and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Customize the home screen Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Modes . To change the name of the current home screen, select Options > Rename mode . To select which applications a nd notifications you wa nt to see in the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of th e ho me screen currently in use, select General theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . 86 Personalization
To change from one home screen to another, scroll to Current mod e , and select Options > Change . Change the display theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . Select from the following: ⢠Gener al â Change the theme used in all app lications. ⢠Menu view â Change the theme used in the main menu. ⢠Standby â Change the theme used in the home screen. ⢠Wallpaper â Change the background image of the home screen. ⢠Power save r â Select an animation for the power saver. ⢠Call image â Change t he image displayed during calls. To activate or deactivate the theme effects, select General > Options > Theme eff ects . Download a theme Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes . To download a theme, select General > Download themes > Options > Go to > N ew web page . Enter the Web address from which you wa nt to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview or activate the theme. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To activate a theme, s elect Opt ions > Set . Change audio themes Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Themes and Audio themes . You can set sounds for variou s device events. The sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both. To change the current audio theme, select Active audio theme . To set a sound for an event, se lect an event group, such as ringing tones, and the desired event. To use all the preset sounds in an event group, select the group and Optio ns > Acti vate sounds . Select Options and from the following: ⢠Play voi ce â Play the sound before activati ng it. ⢠Save theme â Create a new audio theme. ⢠3-D ringing tones â Add 3-D effects to the audio theme. ⢠Speech â Se lect Sp eech to set speech as the sound for an event. En ter the desired tex t to the text fi eld. The Speech option is not a vailable if you hav e activated the Say caller's name option in the current profile. ⢠Deactivate sou nds â Silence all the sounds in an event group. 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > 3-D tones . 87 Personalization
To enable three-dimensional (3-D) sound effects for ringing tones, sele ct 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones support 3âÂÂD effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory speed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to an other. This setting is not available for all effects. ⢠Reverberation â Select the desired effect to adjust the amount of echo. To listen to the ringing tone with th e 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the v olume of the ringin g tone, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Prof iles and Options > Cu stomize > Ringing volume . 88 Personalization
Media Your device contains a variety of m edia applications for both business and leisure time use. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Select Menu > Media > Camera . Your device supp orts an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels. The image reso lution in this guide may appear different. 1. Use the display as a viewfinder. 2. To zoom in or out before capturing an image, scroll up or down. 3. If the Optical N avi key is activated, t o autofocus, hold your finger on the scroll key. To capture the image, press the scroll key. If the Optical Navi key is deactiv ated, to autofocus, press and hold the scroll key. To capture the image, release the scroll key. The device saves the image in Gallery. See "Optical Navi key," p. 25 . The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and af ter capturing an image or recording a video. Select from the following: Switch to image mode. Switch to video mode. Select the scene. Switch to panorama mode. Switch the video light on or off (video mode only) Switch the video light on or off (video mode only) Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer ( images only). Activate sequence mode (images only). Select a color tone. Adjust the white balance. The available options vary depending on the mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default values when you close the camera. To customize the camera tool bar, switch to image mode, and select Options > Customize to olbar . Scenes Select Menu > Media > Camera . 89 Media
A scene helps you to find the right color and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene modes in t he toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined, and select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based o n scene mod e and the desired scene. To activate y our own scene, select User def ined > Select . Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Media > Camera . To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Seque nce mode in the toolbar and press the scroll key. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time interval, only the last image is shown on the display, and the other images are available in Ga llery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To send the image to a caller during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . To turn off sequence mode, select Se quence mode > Single shot in the toolbar. View captured image Select Menu > Media > Camera . The image you captu red is automatically saved in Gallery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the i mage to compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the image to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the image to yo ur compatible on line album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image t o a contact, select Options > Assign to contact . Record videos Select Menu > Media > Camera . 1. If the camera is in image mode, select video mode from the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the scroll key. 3. To pause recording, select Pause . S elect Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in Ga llery. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. 90 Media
Play a video Select Menu > Media > Camera . To play a recorded video, select Play from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video to other compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the video to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the video to an online album (network service). ⢠Delet e â Delete the video. To enter a new name for the video, select Options > Rename vide o clip . Image setting s Select Menu > Media > Camera . To modify still image settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Image quality â Set the image quality. The better the image quality, the more me mory the image consumes. ⢠Add to album â Define to which al bum the captured images are saved. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image after the capture, select Yes . To continue capturing images immediately, select Off . ⢠Defaul t image nam e â Define the default name for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital zoo m â The On (continuous) option allows the zoom in crements to be smooth and continuous between the digi tal and exten ded digital zoom. The Off option allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â Set the tone that s ounds when you capture an image. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to store your images. ⢠Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. Video settings Select Menu > Media > Camera . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with OCIF resolution, in the 3GPP fi le format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 2 0 seconds). You may not be able to send video cl ips saved in the MP EG-4 file format in a mult imedia message. ⢠Audio recording â S el ec t Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Add to album â Define to whi ch album the recorded videos are saved. ⢠Show captured video â View the first frame of the recorded video after the recording stops. To view the entire video, select Play from the toolbar. ⢠Default video name â D efine the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to store your videos. ⢠Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. 91 Media
Gallery About Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Gallery is a storage p lace for your images, video an d sound clips, song s, and streaming link s. Main view Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Select from the following: ⢠Images â View images and video clips in Photos. ⢠Video clips â View video clips in Video center. ⢠Songs â Open Music player. ⢠Sound clips â Listen to sound clips. ⢠Streaming links â View and open streaming links. ⢠Presentati ons â View presentations. You can browse and open folders and copy and move items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. Files stored on your compatible memory card (if insert ed) are indicated with . To open a file, select the file from the list. Video clips and streaming links open and play in Video center, and music and sound clips in Music player. To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and the appro priate option. Sound clips Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Sound clips . This folder contains all the sound clips you have downloaded from the web. The sound clips created with the Recorder application w ith MMS-optimized or norm al quality settings are also saved in this folder, but the sound clips created with high qua lity settings are stored in the Music player application. To listen to a sound file, select the file from the list. To rewind or fast-forward, scroll left or right. To download sounds, se lect Downld. sounds . Streaming links Select Menu > Media > Gallery and Streamin g links . To open a streaming link, select the link from the list. To add a new streaming link, select Options > New link . Presentations Select Menu > Media > Gallery . With presentations, you can view scalable vector graphics (SVG) and flash files (SWF), su ch as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their ap pearance when printed or viewed with different scr een sizes and resolutions. To view files, select Present ations. Go to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . 92 Media
To zoom in, pr ess 5 . To zoom out, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen mode, press * . Photos About Photos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and from the following: ⢠Captured â View all the images and videos you have captured. ⢠Months â View images and vi deos categorized by the month they where captured. ⢠Albums â View th e default albums and the on es you have created. ⢠Tags â View the tags you ha ve created for each item. ⢠Downl oads â View items and videos downloaded from the web or received as a multimedia or e-mail message. ⢠All â View all items. ⢠Share online â P o s t y o u r i m a g e s o r v i d e o s t o t h e w e b . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To copy or move files to another memory location, select a file, Options > Move and copy , and from the available options. View imag es and video s Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images an d from the following: ⢠All â View all images and videos . ⢠Captured â View images captured and video clips recorded with the camera of your device. ⢠Downloads â View downloaded videos. Images and videos can also be sent to y ou from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video in Photos, you must fi rst save it. The images and video clip files are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displ ayed. To brows e the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To open a file, select the fi le. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, use the zoom keys. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently . To edit an image or a video, select Opti ons > Edit . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > To printer o r kiosk . To move images to an albu m for later printing, select Options > Add to album > Print later . 93 Media
View and edit file details Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . Go to an item. To view and edit image or video properties, select Options > Details > View and edit and from the following: ⢠Tags â View the currently used tags. To add more tags to the current file, select Add . ⢠Description â View a free-form descr iption of the file. To add a description, select the field. ⢠Title â View the thumbnail ima ge of the file and the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. ⢠Albums â View in which albums the current file is located. ⢠Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. ⢠Duration â View the length of the video. ⢠Usage rig hts â To view the DRM rights of the current file, select View . Organize images and videos Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . You can organize files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . To delete an image or vide o clip, select the item and Delete from the active toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the active toolbar, go to different items, and select the desired option. The availabl e options vary depending on the view you are in and wh ether you have s elected an image or a video clip. To hide the toolbar, select Optio ns > Hide toolbar . To activate the active toolbar when it is hidden, press the scroll key. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: View the image in la ndscape or portrait mode. Play the video clip. Send the image or video clip. Upload the image or video clip to a compatible online album (only available i f you have set up an account for a compatible online album). Add the item to an album. Manage tags and other properties of the item. Albums Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s and Albums . With albums , you can co nveniently man age your images and video clips. 94 Media
To create a new album , select Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Optio ns > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the albu m to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and the item, and Options > Remov e from album . Tags Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Use tags to categorize media i tems in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the currently used tags a nd the number of ite ms associated with each tag. To open Tag mana ger, select an image or video clip and Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New tag . To assign a tag to an im age, select the image and Options > Add tags . To see the tags you have created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images associated with a tag, select the tag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Option s > Alphabetical . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Most used . To remove an image from a tag, select the ta g and the image, and select Options > Remove f rom tag . Slide show Select Menu > Media > Gallery > Image s . To v ie w y ou r im ag es a s a sl ide show, select an im age and Options > Slide sh ow > Play forwards or Play backwards . The slide show starts from the se lected file. To view only the selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images. To start the slide show, sele ct Option s > Slide show > Play forwards or Play b ackwards . To resume a pause d slide show, select Continue . To end the slide show, select End . To browse the images, scroll left or right. Before starting t he slide show, t o adjust the slide show settings, select Option s > Slide show > Settings an d from the following: ⢠Music â Add soun d to the slide show. ⢠Song â Select a music file from the list. ⢠Delay between slides â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. ⢠Transition â Make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and zoom in and out in the images randomly. To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume key . 95 Media
Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures after taking them or the ones already saved in Photos, select Options > Ed it . The image editor opens . To open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons, select Options > Apply effect . You can crop and rotate the im age; adjust the brightness , color, contrast and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop , and a predefined aspect ra tio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scro ll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corne r. Agai n se lect the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area , select Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped imag e. If you selec t a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cr op ped. To resi ze the highlig hted area, use the scroll key. To fr eeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reducti on . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the displa y. To resize the loop to fit t he size of the eye, use the scroll key. T o reduce the redness, press the scroll key. When yo u have finished editing the image, press Done . To save the chang es and return to the previous view, press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the following shor tcuts w hen editing images: ⢠To view a full-screen image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left or right. Edit videos The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variation s of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edit , and from the following: ⢠Merge â to add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip ⢠Change sound â to add a new soun d clip, and to replace the original sound in the video clip. ⢠Add text â to add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip 96 Media
⢠Cut â to trim the video and m ark the section s you want to keep in the video clip To take a snapshot of a video clip, in the cut video view, select Options > T ake snapshot . In the thum bnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . Print images Image print To print ima ges with Image pr int, select the ima ge you want to print, and the print option in Photos, camera, image editor or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivi ty. You can als o print images using wireless LAN.If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can st ore the images to the memory card and print them using a comp atible printer. You can only p rint images th at are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the came ra are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, s elect the image and the print option. When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed . Select a printer. The printer is set as the default prin ter. To use a printer compatible with PictBridge, connect the compatible data cable before y ou select the print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . The printer is automatically displayed when you sele ct the print option. If the default printer is not avai lable, a list of available printers is displayed. To change the default prin ter, select Optio ns > Settings > Default printe r . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary de pending on the capabilities of the printing de vice you selected. To set a default pr inter, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Share online About Share onlin e Select Menu > Media > Share online . With Share online (network service), you can p ost your images, video clips, and sound clips from your device to compatible online sharing services, such as albums and 97 Media
blogs. You can also vie w and send comments to the posts in these services, and download content to your compatible Nokia dev ice. The supported content types and the a vailability of the Share online service may vary. Subscribe to services Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To subscribe to an online sharing service, go to the service provider's website, and check that your Nokia device is compatible with the serv ice. Create an account as instructed on the website. You receive a user n ame and password needed to set up your device with the account. 1. To activate a service, open the Share online ap plication in your device, select a service and Options > Activate . 2. Allow the device to create a network connection. If you are prompted for an internet access point, select one from the list. 3. Sign in to your accou nt as instructed on the service providerâÂÂs website. For the availabili ty and cost of the th ird party services an d data transfer costs, contact your service provider or the relevant t hird par ty. Manage your accounts To view your ac counts, select Options > Settings > My accounts . To create a new account, select Options > Add new account . To change your user name or password for an account, select the account and Options > Ope n . To set the account as the default when sending posts from your device, select Optio ns > Set as default . To remove an account, select the account and Options > Delete . Create a post Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To post media files to a service, select a service and Options > New upload . If the online sharing service provides channels for postin g files, select the desired channel. To add an image, video clip, or sound clip to the post, select Options > Insert . Enter a title or description for the post, if ava ilable. To add tags to the post, se lect Tags: . To send the post to the service, select Optio ns > Upload . Post files from Photos You can post your files from Photos to an online sharing service. 1. Sele ct Menu > Media > Gallery > Images and the files you want to post. 98 Media
2. Select Option s > Send > Upload and the desired account. 3. Edit your post as required. 4. Select Option s > Upload . One-click uplo ad One-click upload lets you post images to an online sharing service immediately after capturing them. To use one-click upload, ca pture an image with your device camera, and select the online sharing icon from the toolbar. Tag list Select Menu > Media > Share online . Tags describe the content of the post, and help viewers find content in the on line sharing services. To view the list of availabl e tags when creating a post, select Tags: . To add tags to your post, select a tag from the list and Done . To add sever al tags to the pos t, select each tag and Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To search for tags, enter the se arch text in the search field. To add a tag to the tag list, select Option s > New tag . Manage posts in Outbox Select Menu > Media > Share online . Outbox shows the posts y ou are currently uploading, post s that have failed t o upload, and the posts you ha ve sent. To open Outbox, select Outbox > Options > Open . To start uploading a post, select the post and Options > Upload now . To cancel uploading a post, select the pos t and Options > Cancel . To delete a post, select the post and Op tions > Delete . View service content Select Menu > Media > Share online . To view the content of a serv ice, select the service and Options > Open . To open a feed, select the f eed. To open the feed in the browser, select the service provider's website. To view comments related to a file, select the file and Options > View comm ents . To view a file in full screen mode, select the file. To update a feed, select the feed and Op tions > Update now . If you see an interesting file and want to download the entire feed to your devi ce, select the file and Options > Subscribe to contact . Service provider settings Select Menu > Media > Share online . 99 Media
To view the list of service providers, select Opti ons > Settings > Service providers . To check the details of a servic e, select the service from the list. To delete the selected service, select Options > Delete . Edit account settings Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To edit your accounts, select Options > Settings > My accounts and an ac count. To change the user name for the account, select User name . To change the password for an account, select Password . To change th e acco unt nam e, select Account name . To determine the size for images that you post, select Upload image s ize > Or iginal , Medium (1024 x 768 pixels), or Small (640 x 480 pixels). Edit advanced settings Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Advanced . To only use a wireless LAN (W LAN) connection for sharing, select Use cel lular > Disabled . To also allow a GPRS connection, select Enabled . To allow sharing and downlo ading items while outside your home network, select Allow roaming > Enabled . To download new items from the service automatically, select Download interval and the interval for the downloads. To download items manually, select Manual . Data counters Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . To check the amount of data you have uploaded and downloaded, select Option s > Settings > Data transferred . To reset the counte rs, select Opt ions > Clear sent , Clear received , or Clear all . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports file formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. Play a song Select Menu > Media > Music player . To add all available songs to the music library, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song, select the desired category, and the song. 100 Media
To pause playback, press the sc roll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop pla yback, scroll down. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To skip to the next item, sc r oll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll le ft. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song has started. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equalizer . To modify the balance and ster eo image, or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key briefly. Warning: Continuous expos ure to high volum e may damage your hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Playlists To view and manage play lists, select Music library > Playlists . To create a new playlist, s elect Option s > New playl ist . To add songs to the playlist, selec t the song and Op tions > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New p laylist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll t o the song you want to move, an d select Option s > Reorder playlist . Ovi Music With Ovi Mu sic (network service), y ou can search, browse, purchase, and download music to your device. The Ovi Music service will ev entually replace the Music store. Select Menu > Media > Ovi Music . To download music, you first need to register for the service. Downloading music may involve addition al costs and the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). For information about data tr ansmission charges, contact your network service provider. To a cc ess Ov i Mu si c, you mus t h av e a v ali d in te rne t ac ce ss point in the device. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to Ovi Music. Select the access point â Select Default access point . The availability and appeara nce of Ovi Music settings may vary. The set tings may al so be predefined and you may not be able to modify them. Wh en browsing Ovi Music, you may be able to modi fy the settings. Modify Ovi Music set tings â Select Options > Settings . Ovi Music is not available for all countries or regions. Transfer music from a computer You can use the following met hods to transfer music: 101 Media
⢠To install Nokia Ovi Player to manage a nd organize your music files, download the PC software from www.ovi.com, and follow the instructions. ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a comp atible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you a re using a USB data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card mu st be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronize musi c with Windows Media Pla yer, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be in serted in the device. To change the def ault US B connection mode, select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player and Options > Go to N ow playi ng > Opti ons > Equalizer . To use a preset frequency setting when playing mu sic, select the frequency setting you want to use and Options > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit and a frequency band, and scroll up or down to adjust its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediately in the playback. To reset the frequency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own frequency setting, select Optio ns > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands , and set the frequency for each band. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays video and sound clips th at are stored on your device, transferred from an e-mail messag e, or a compatible computer, or stream ed to your device over the web. Supported file formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streamin g), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all variat ions of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video, select Video clips, and a video. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. RealPlayer recognizes two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL an d an http:// URL that poin ts to a RAM file. Before the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a website and buffer the content. If a network connection problem cau ses a playback error, RealPlayer attempts automa tically to reconnect to the internet access point. To download video clips from the web, select Downld. videos . 102 Media
To adjust the volume during playba ck, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during play back, scroll right and hold. To rewind during play, scroll left and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or the connection to the streaming site stops, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To view the video in full-screen mode, select Options > Continue in normal scr. . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video or sound clip, or web link, select Options > C lip details . Information may include for example the bit rate or the internet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Media > Real Playe r . You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Opt ions > Settings > Video or Streaming . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Record er . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations . The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, select Op tions > Settings . Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conversation, open the recorder during a voice call, and select . Both pa rties hear a to ne at regular interval s during recording. Flash player With Flash player, you can vi ew, play, and interact with flash files made for mobile devices. To open Flash player and play a flash file, select the file. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Optio ns > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash file s saved in the device memory or on the memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash file quality, select Option s > Quality when you are playing the flash file. If yo u select High , the playback of some flash files may appear uneven and slow due to their origina l settings. Change the qualit y 103 Media
setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organize your flash files, select Options > Organize . FM radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or accessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. Listen to the r adio Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. You can make a call or answ er an incoming call while listening to the radio. The ra dio is muted when there is an active call. To start a st ation search, select or . If you have saved radio stations in your device, to go to the next or previous saved station, sele ct or . Select Optio ns and from the following: ⢠Activate loudspeaker â L i s t e n t o t h e r a d i o u s i n g t h e loudspeaker. ⢠Manual tuning â Change the frequen cy manually. ⢠Station directo ry â View available stations based on location (network service). ⢠Save station â Save t he station to which you are currently tuned to your station list. ⢠Stations â Open the list of your sa ved stations. ⢠Play in backg round â Return to the home screen while listening to the FM radio in the background. Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near you r ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Saved stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To open the list of your saved stations, select Optio ns > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To change station details, select Opt ions > Station > Edit . FM radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > FM radio . To automatically search for alterna tive frequencies if the reception is weak, select Options > Settings > Alternative fr equencies > Auto s can on . To set the default access point for the radio, select Options > Settings > Access point . 104 Media
To select the region wher e you currently are, select Options > Settings > Current region . This settin g is displayed only if there is no network coverage when you start the applicat ion. Nokia Internet Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . With the Nokia Internet Radio application (network service), you can listen to available radio stations on t he internet. To listen to rad io stations, you must have a wireless LAN (WLAN) or packet data access point defined in your device. Listening to the stations may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service f ees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to internet radio stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To listen to a radio station on the internet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favorites or the station directory, or search for stations by name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To add a station manually, select Optio ns > Add station manually . You can also browse for station links with the Web browser application. Compatible links are automatically open ed in the Internet Radio application. 2. Select Optio ns > List en . The Now playing view opens, displaying information about the cu rrently play ing station and song. To pause the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll ke y again. To view station information, select Options > Stati on information (not available if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a station save d in your favorites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Favorite stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To view and listen to your favorite stations, select Favorites . To add a station manually to favorites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web add ress of the station and a name tha t you want to appear in t he favorites list. To add the currently playi ng station to favorites, s elect Options > Add to Favorite s . To view station information, to m ove a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from favorites, select Options > Station and the desired option. 105 Media
To view only stations beginnin g with particular letters or numbers, start enterin g the charact ers. Matching stations are displayed. Search for stations Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio . To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by name, do the following: 1. Sele ct Search . 2. Enter a station name or the first letters of the name in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations a re displayed. To listen to a station, select the stat ion and Listen . To save a station to your favori tes, select the stat ion and Options > Add to Favorite s . To make another s earch, select Options > Search again . Station director y Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet radio and Station director y . The station directory is mainta ined by Nokia. If you want to listen to internet radio stations outside the directory, add station information manu ally or browse for station links on the internet with the Web browser application. Select from the following: ⢠Browse by genre â View the available radio station genres. ⢠Browse by language â View the languages in which there are stations broadcasting. ⢠Browse by country/region â View the countries in which there are stat ions broadcasting. ⢠Top stations â View the most popular stations in the directory. Internet radio settings Select Menu > Media > Radio > Internet rad io and Options > Settings . To select the default access point to con nect to the network, select Default access point an d from the available options. If you wa nt the device to ask you to select the access point ev ery time you open the application, select Always ask . To change the connection sp eeds for different connection types, select from the following: ⢠GPRS connection bitrate â GPRS packet data connections ⢠3G connection bitrate â 3 G p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n s ⢠Wi-Fi connection bitrate â WLAN connections The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To av oid buffering, use the highest quality only with high speed connections. 106 Media
Security and data management Manage the data and s oftware on your device, and take care of the security of th e device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus function ality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device The lock code protects your device against unaut horized use. The preset code is 12345. To lock the device, in the home screen, press the power key, and select Lock phone . To unlock your device, se lect Unlock > OK , enter the lock code, and select OK . To change the lock c ode, sel ect Menu > Ctr l. panel > Settings General > Se curity > Ph one and SIM card . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. A minimum of 4 characters is required, and numbers, symbols, and upp er and lower case letters can be used. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your devi ce. If you fo rget the lock code and your device is locked, your device will requir e service. Additional charges may apply, and all the person al data i n your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. Lock your device remotely 1. To enable remote locking, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Security > Ph one and SI M car d > Remote ph one locking > Enabled . 2. Enter the text message cont ent. It can be 5-20 characters, and both uppe r and lower case letters can be used. 3. Enter the same text again to verify it. 4. Enter the lock code. 5. To lock the device remotely , write the predefined text, and send it to your device as a text messag e. To unlock your device, you need the lock code. Memory card security Select Menu > Office > File mgr. . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorized access. To set a password, select Options > Memory card password > Set . The password can be up to 8 characters long and is case-se nsitive. The passw ord is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you are asked for 107 Security and data m anagement
the password. Not all me mo ry cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, se lect Options > Memory card pass word > Remove . When you remove the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unauthorized use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unlock memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case the card is unlocked and pa ssword removed. Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Encryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without saving key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryption key. If you select this option, you cannot use the memory card in other devices, and if you restore factory settings, you cannot decrypt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â En crypt the memory card and save the key manually i n the default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. E nter a pass phrase for the key and a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with restored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have received. Select the key file and enter the pass phrase. Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the device memory and/or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To decrypt the memory card with out destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . To decrypt the memory card and destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and tu rn off encryptio n . Fixed dialing Select Menu > Contacts an d Options > SIM number s > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialing servi ce, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialing service. For more information, contact your service provider. 108 Security and data m anagement
When security featur es that restrict ca lls are in use (suc h as call restriction, cl osed user group, and fixed dialing), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call restriction and call forwarding cannot be active at the same tim e. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivat e fixed dialing or edit your fixed dialing contacts . Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: ⢠Activate fixed dialing â Activate the fixed dialing. ⢠Deactivate fi xed dialing â Deactivate th e fixed dialing. ⢠New SIM con tact â Enter the contact name a nd phone number to which calls are allowed. ⢠Add from Contacts â C opy a contact from the list of contacts to the fixed dialing list. To send text messages t o the SIM contacts while the fixed dialing service is active , you need to a dd the text message centre number to the fixed dialing list . Certificate manager Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral > Security > Certificate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guaran tee safety. There are four different types of certificat es: authority certificates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and device certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an authority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of th e server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certi ficates should be used w h e n y o u c o n n e c t t o a n o n l i n e b a n k o r a r e m o t e s e r v e r t o transfer confidential inform ation. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software, and to check the au thenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certifica te, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the validity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Cert ificate d etails . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not trusted â You have not set any application to use the certif icate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid ye t â Th e perio d of va lidity h as not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate i ssuer. 109 Security and data m anagement
Certificate trust settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Security > Certificate management . Trusting a certificate mea ns th at you auth orize it to verify web pages, e-mai l servers, software packages and other data. Only trusted certifica tes can be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certific ates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "C ertificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change th e trust setting s, select a certificate an d Options > Trust settings . Scroll to an application field, and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot change the trust sett ings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installation â N ew Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installation â New Java application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. View and edit security modules Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Security > Security module . To view or edit a security module, select the module from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security d etails . To edit the PIN codes for th e security module, open the module, and select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change these codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of the securi ty module. To delete the key store, select Options > Delete . You may not be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Remote configuration Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings, da ta, and software on your device remotely. You can connect to a server, and receive configurat ion settings for your device. You may receive server profiles 110 Security and data m anagement
and different configuration settings from your service providers or company information management department. Configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration conn ection is usua lly started by the server when the device se ttings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server nam e â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server I D â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server pas sword â E n t e r a p a s s w o r d t o i d e n t i f y y o u r device to the server. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a ne w access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This settin g is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User na me and Passw ord â Enter your user ID and password for the co nfiguration server. ⢠Allow config uration â S e le c t Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-acce pt all requ ests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Networ k authenticat ion â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Networ k user nam e and Network password â Enter your user ID and password for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticati on to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Opt ions > Start configuration . To view the configuration log o f the selected profile, select Options > View log . To update the device soft ware over the air, select Options > Check for updates . The update does not erase your settings. W hen you re ceive the update package on your device, follow the instru ctions on the display. Your device is restarted once the installa tion is complete. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the u pdate. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. B e s u r e t o b a c k u p d a t a b e f o re accepting installation of an update. Application manager With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of 111 Security and data m anagement
installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. You can install two types of applications and software to your device: ⢠JME applications based on Java technology with the .j ad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and soft ware suitable for the Symbian operating system with the .sis or .sisx file extensions Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications and software You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatib le compute r, downlo ad them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using oth er co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia Appli cation Installer in Nokia Ovi Suite to install an application to your devic e. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . The installation files are in th e Installation files folder, and installed applications in th e Installed apps. folder. Icons indicate the following: .sis or .sisx application Java application Application insta lled on the memory card Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing . Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the applicati on type, version number an d the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Option s > View details . To display the security certificate details of the application, select View details . ⢠If you install a file that contain s an update or repa ir to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the or iginal application, remove the application, and insta ll the application ag ain from the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to s elect one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the s erver. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an application or software: 1. To loc ate an inst allation file, press Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. , and select Installation files . Alternatively, search inst allation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message that contain s an installation file. 112 Security and data m anagement
2. In Application manager, select the application you want to install. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the in stallation. If you install an application withou t a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warn ing. Continue insta llation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an inst alled application, select the applic ation. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Installat ions folder in the main menu. To see which software packa g es are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus function ality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applica tions to a compat ible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use la rge amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation file s to a compatible PC , then us e the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package and select Optio ns > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open files created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. For more infor mation, see the documentation of the inst alled software package. Application manager settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software installation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verifi ed digital signature can be installed. ⢠Online certificate check â Check the online certificates before installing an application. ⢠Default web address â Set the default address used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications ma y require that a message be sent or a network connection be made to a specific access point to download extra data or components. Licenses About Licenses Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Li censes . 113 Security and data m anagement
Some media files, such as imag es, music or video clips, are protected by digital usage rights . The licenses for such files may allow or restrict their us age. For example, with some licenses you may listen to a song only a limited number of times. During one playback session you ma y rewind, fast- forward, or pause the song , but once you stop i t, you have used one of the instances allowed. Use licenses Digital rights mana gement (DRM) protected content comes with an associ ated lice nse that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected content, to back up both the license and the cont ent, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. Other transfer m ethods may not transfer th e license which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-p rotected content after the d e v i c e m e m o r y i s f o r m a t t e d . Y o u m a y a l s o n e e d t o r e s t o r e the license in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM-protected content, both the license and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lo se the license and the content if the files on your device get corrupted . Losing the license or the content may limit your ab ility to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some license may be connec ted to a specific S IM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your licenses by type, select Valid licenses , Invalid li censes , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Options > License details . The following details are displayed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Lic ense is val id , Licens e expired or License not yet valid . ⢠Content sending â Allowed indicates that you can send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes indicates that the file i s in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No indicates that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a license, in the licenses main view, select Invalid li censes > O ptions > Get new license . Establish a network connection at the prompt, and you are directed to a website where yo u can pur chase rights to the media. To remove file rights, go to the desired file, and select Options > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group license view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have down loaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view fr om either the valid licenses or invalid licenses tabs. To access these files , open the group rights folder. Sync Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Phone > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronize your notes , calendar entries, text and multi media messages, browser 114 Security and data m anagement
bookmarks, or contac ts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronization settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronization profile con tai ns the necessary settings for synchronization. When you open the Sync application, the default or previously used sync profile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item, and select Mark to include it in the profile or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles , select Options and the desired option. To synchronize data, select Optio ns > Synchronize . To cancel synchronization befo re it finishes, select Cancel . Mobile VPN Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual private network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and serv ices, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the internet, to a corporate VPN gateway that acts as a front door to the compatible corporate network. The VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) technology. IPSec is a framework of open standards for supporting the secure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to aut henticate each other, and the encryption algorithms that they u se to help protect the confidentiality of data. For a VPN p olicy, contact your company's IT department . To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT administrator of your organiza tion. Manage VPN Select from the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, an d update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the con nection settings of VPN policy servers from which y ou can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manage r (NSSM), which is not necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the log for your VPN policy installations, updates a nd synchronizations, and other VPN connections. Edit VPN access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations . An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services, or to browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Vi rtual private network (VPN) access points pair VPN policies with regular internet access points to create secu re connections. Your service provider may preset some or all access points for your device, and you may not be ab le to create, edit, or remove them. 115 Security and data m anagement
Select a destination and Options > Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â E nter a name fo r the VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access p oint â Select the internet access point with which to combine the VPN policy to create secure connections for data transfer. ⢠Proxy server add ress â Enter the prox y server address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port nu mber â Enter the proxy port number. ⢠Use access point â Select whethe r connections using this access point are established a utomatically. The settings available for editing may vary. For the correct settings, contact your company's IT departm ent. Use a VPN con nection in a n applic ation You may have to prove your identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your company's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the app lication must be associated with a VPN access point. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a li st of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in whic h you want t o create a VPN connection, select a VPN access point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy au thentication, enter your VP N user name and passcode or password. If the SecurID token has become out of synchronization with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next pass code. If you are using certificate-base d authen tication, yo u may have to enter the key store password. 116 Security and data m anagement
Settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . You can define and modify var ious settings of your device. Modifying these settings a ffects the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change such s ettings. Select the setting you want t o edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider, and scroll left or right to adjust a value. General settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral . Select from the following: ⢠Personalization â Chang e the display settin gs, and personalize the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancement â Modify the settings for your accessories. ⢠Sensors â Change the sensor settings. ⢠Security â Modify the security settings. ⢠Factory settings â Restore the original settings of the devic e. ⢠Positi oning â Def ine the posi tioning method and server for GPS-based applicat ions. The available options may vary. Personalization settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gener al > Personalizati on . Display settings To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . To adjust the length of time the dis play can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver time -out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > We lcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the display dims after the last key press, select Display > Light time- out . Tone settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings . 117 Settings
Select General > Personalization > To nes and from the following:. ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, y ou can specify a ringing t one for each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a ringing tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â If you select this setting and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringing tone tha t is a combination of the spoken name of the contac t and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you want the ringing ton e to alert you. ⢠Ringing volume â Set the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Selec t a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Calendar alarm tone â Select a tone for calendar alerts. ⢠Clock alarm to ne â Select a tone for clock alarms. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call or message. ⢠Keypad tones â Set the volume level of the keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. Language settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalization > Language . ⢠Phone la nguage â Set the device language. ⢠Writing language â Select the lang uage used for writing notes and messages. ⢠Predicti ve text â Activate predictive text input. ⢠Input opt ions â Define th e settings for predictive text input. Scroll key lights Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalization > Notifica tion light s . To set the scroll key to blink slowly when you do not use the device, select Standby br. light . To set the scroll key to blink rapidly when you have missed calls or received messages, select Notification light , se t the blinking time, and select the events you want to be notified of. Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Personalization > One-touch keys . To select which application and task is opened when you press a One-touch key, sele ct the key and Option s > Open . To restore the preset applications and tasks, select Restore defaults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Date and time . Select from the following: ⢠Date and Time â Set the current date and time. ⢠Time zone â Define your time zone. 118 Settings
⢠Date for mat and Date separato r â Define the date format and separator. ⢠Time format and Time separator â Select whet her to use the 12-hour or 24-hour clock sy stem and with which symbol to separa te hours and minutes. ⢠Clock type â Define the clock type. ⢠Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for the alarm clock. ⢠Alarm snooze ti me â Define the snooze time for the alarm clock. ⢠Workdays â Define the days of the week that are work days for you. ⢠Automati c time u pdate â Update the time, date, and time zone information automa tically (network service). Accessory settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gen eral > Enhancement . To define which profile is activated wh en you attach an accessory to your device, select the accessory and Default profile . To set the device to ans wer phone calls automati cally after 5 seconds when an accessor y is attached, select the accessory and Automatic an swer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, automatic an swering is disabled. To illuminate the device w hile it is attached to an accessory, select Lights > On . This option is only available for certain accessories. Sensor settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gener al > Sensors . To set the device to silence an incoming call or snooze an alarm when you tu rn the device face dow n, select Turning control . Security settings Security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Gener al > Security . Select from the following: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Edit the security settings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Protected c ontent â Edit your settings for DRM- protected content. ⢠Security module â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. Wh en you change a code, enter the current code, th en the new code twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone an d SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorized u se and is provided with the SIM card. After three cons ecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked and you 119 Settings
need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock automatically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out after whi ch the device is automatica lly locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SIM card > Phone aut olock period . Enter a number for the t ime-out in minutes or select No ne to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alpha bets and digits can be used, and both upperc ase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not proper ly formatt ed. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Genera l > Factory setting s . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents, contact informat ion, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Positioning settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General > Positio ning . To use a specific positioning method to detect the location of your device , sele ct Positioning method s . To select a positioning serve r, select Positioning server . To select which me asurement system yo u want to use for speeds and distances, s elect Notation preferen ces > Measurement s ystem . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your device, select Notation pr eferences > Coordinate format . E-mail key settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and General . To select which mailbox to open with the e-mail key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key and press the scroll key. Telephon e settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call forwarding â Define your call forwarding settings. See "Call forward," p. 32 . ⢠Call restriction â Define your call restricting settings. See "Call restrictions," p. 33 . 120 Settings
⢠Networ k â Adjust the network settings. Call settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Pho ne > Call . Select from the following: ⢠Send my caller ID â Display your phone number to the person you are calling. ⢠Send my internet call ID â Display your internet call address to the person you are ca lling using an intern et call. This setting is only available if you have defined internet call service setti ngs. ⢠Call waiting â S e t t h e d e v i c e t o n o t i f y y o u o f i n c o m i n g calls while you are in a call (network service). ⢠Internet call wait ing â Set the device to notify you of a new incoming intern et call while you are in a call. This setting is only avai lable if you have defined internet call service setti ngs. ⢠Internet ca ll alert â Select On to set your de vice to alert for incoming intern et calls. If you selec t Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. This setting is only available if you have defined in ternet call service settings. ⢠Decline call with msg. â R e j e c t a c a l l , a n d s e n d a t e x t message to th e caller. ⢠Message text â Write the standard text message tha t is sent when you reject a call. ⢠Own video in re cvd. call â Allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. ⢠Image in video c all â Display a still image if video is not sent during a video call. ⢠Automatic redial â Set your device to make a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redia ling, press the end key. ⢠Show call durati on â Display the length of a call during the call. ⢠Summary after call â Display the length of a call after the call. ⢠1-touc h dialing â Ac tivate 1-touch dialing. ⢠Anykey answer â Ac tivate anykey answer. ⢠Noise cancellation â Ac tivate earpiece active noise cancellation. ⢠Contact se arch â Activate contact search in the home screen. Network settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Phon e > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In dual mode, the device switches automatically between networks. Tip: Selecti ng UMTS enables faster data transfer, but may increase the demand on bat tery power and reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumping be tween the two networks, which also increases the deman d on battery power. To select the operator, select Operator se lection and Manual to select from available networks, or Automatic to set the device to select the network a utomatically. 121 Settings
To set the device to indicate when it is used in a microcellular network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. ⢠USB â Edit the da ta cable settings. ⢠Destinations â Set up new or ed it existing access points. Some or all access p oints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit or remove them. ⢠VPN â Manage th e settin gs for virtual private networking. ⢠Packet data â Define when packet data network is attached, and enter the default packet switched access point name if you use your device as a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Set the device to display an indicator when a wireless LAN (WLAN) is availa ble, and define how often the device search es for networks. ⢠Video sharing â Enable video sharing, select the SIP profile for video sharing, and define the video saving settings. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session i nitiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠XDM profile â Create an XDM pr ofile. The XDM profile is required for many commu nications applications, for example, presence. ⢠Presence â Edit the settings for presence (network service). To register for the service, contact your service provider. ⢠Remote drive s â Connect the device to a remote drive. ⢠Configurat ions â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â R estrict packet d ata con nection s. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings an d Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a m essage from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you select one of the access point groups ( , , , , ), you can see th e access point type s: indicates a protected ac cess point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wire less LAN (WLAN ) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new a ccess point, select Access point . The device asks you to check for available conn ections. After the search, connections that a re already available are displayed and can be shared by a new access point. If you 122 Settings
skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of a n access point, select one of the access point groups, scroll t o an access point, and select Options > Edit . Use the instructions p rovided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠Connec tion name â Enter a name for the connection. ⢠Data b earer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red * . Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if neces sary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups to connect to a network. To avoid selecting which access p oint to use every time the device attempts to connect to a n etwork, you can create a group that con tains vari ous access points, and define the order in which th e access points are used to connect to a network. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) an d packet data access points to an intern et access point group and use the group for browsing th e web. If you give the WLAN access point the higher priority, the device connects to the internet th rough a WL AN if available and thr ough a packet data connection if not. To create a new acce ss point gr oup, sele ct Options > Manage > New destinatio n . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Optio ns > New access p oint . To copy an existing access point from another group, select the group, scroll to an existing access point, and select Options > Organize > Copy to oth er dest. . To change the priority order of access points within a group, scroll to an a ccess point, and select Options > Organize > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠Access point name â The access point name is provided by your service provider. ⢠User na me â The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usua lly provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt passwo rd â If you want to set the device to ask for a password every time you log into a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . ⢠Passw ord â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by your service provider. 123 Settings
⢠Authenti cation â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Depending on the access point type you are setting up, enter the we b address or the address of the multimedia message center. ⢠Use access point â Select After confirmat ion to set the device to ask for confirmation before th e connection using this a ccess point is created, or Automatically to set the device to connect to the destination using this ac cess point automa tically. Select Optio ns > Advanced sett ings and from the following: ⢠Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. Th e other settings depend on the selected network t ype. ⢠Phone IP address (for IPv4 only ) â Enter the IP address of your device. ⢠DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresse s of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. ⢠Proxy server address â Enter the address of the p roxy server. ⢠Proxy port nu mber â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the display. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Options > Edit . Use the instructions provided by your service provider to edit the following: ⢠WLAN network name â S elect Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. ⢠Network status â Define whether the network na me is displayed. ⢠WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network, and to allow devices to send an d receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the same WLAN network name. ⢠WLAN security mo de â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA2 . (802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are not available for ad hoc networks .) If you select Open net work , no encryption is u sed. The WEP, 802.1x , and WPA functions can be used on ly if the network supports them. ⢠Use access point â Select After confirmation to set the device to ask for co nfirmation before the connection using this access point is created or Automati cally to set the device to connect to the destination using this ac cess point automatica lly. To enter the settin gs for the selected security mode, select WLAN security setti ngs . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings an d from the following: ⢠IPv4 settings â Enter the IP address o f your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secon dary DNS servers. 124 Settings
Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. ⢠IPv6 settings â Define the type of DNS addr ess. ⢠Ad-hoc channel (only for ad hoc networks) â To enter a channel number (1-11 ) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy serv er address â Enter the address for the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port numbe r â Enter the proxy port numb er. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Packet data . Your device su pports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. Wh en you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is possible to have m ultiple data connections active at the same time; access points can share a data connection, and data connectio ns remain active, for exampl e, during voice calls. To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connection and When available to register the device to the packet data netw ork when you switch the device on in a supported network, or When needed to register the device to a packet data netw ork only when an application or action attempts to establish a pa cket data connection. This setting affects all access p oints for packet data connections. To use the device as a packet data modem for your computer, select Access point , and enter the access point name provided by your service provider. To use a high-speed data connection, select Hi gh speed packet access > Enabled . WLAN settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a wireless LAN (WLAN) availa ble in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs, and to update the in dicator, select Scan for networks . This s etting is not available unless you select Show WLAN availabi lity > Yes . To set the device to test the internet capability of the selected WLAN automatically , to ask for permission every time, or to never perform th e connectivity test, select Internet connectivity te st > R un automatically , As k every time , or Neve r run . If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when th e device asks for it, and the co nnectivity tes t is perfor med successfully, the access poin t is saved to internet destinations. To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies yo ur device, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommen ded. To edit the settings manua lly, select Automatic configuration > Disabled and define the following: 125 Settings
⢠Long retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if the dev ice does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the m aximum number of transmission attempts if the dev ice does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the d ata pac ket si ze at wh ich the WLAN access point devi ce issues a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio measuremen ts â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power savi ng â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to save the power in the device battery. Using the power saving me chanism enhances the battery pe rformance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their ori ginal values, select Options > Restore default s . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the dis play. To edit a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . To enter th e settings for the se lected sec urity mode, select WLAN security se ttings . WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmit ted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not h ave the required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not encry pted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc netw ork, all de vices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settings â Edit the settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc netw ork, all de vices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN security settings > WE P key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encry ption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want to enter the WEP key data in ASCII or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 126 Settings
802.1x authenticates and authorizes de vices to access a wireless network, and p revents access if the authorizati on process fails. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you selected WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in y our device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â I f y o u s e l e c t e d WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key th at identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WPA2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug -ins defined in y our device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â If you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key th at identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Sett ings and Connection > Destinations , and an access point group. The extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication servers , and the different EAP plug-ins make possible the use of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP p lug-ins current ly installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-i n settings, select Options > New access point and define an access point th at uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WPA 2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN security settings > WPA/W PA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in setting s . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-i n when you connect to a WLA N using the access point, select the desired pl ug-in and Options > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this access point have a check m ark next to them. T o not use a plug- in, select Option s > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Optio ns > Edit . To change the priority of the EAP plug-in s ettings, sele ct Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug-in before other plug-ins w hen connecting to the n etwork with the access point, or Op tions > Lower priority to use 127 Settings
this plug-in for network authen tication after attempting to use other plug-ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > SIP settings . The session initiation protocol (SIP) is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical communication sessions are video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Optio ns > New SIP profile > Use default profile or Use exis ting profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Op tions > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Menu > Ctrl. pane l > Sett ings and Connection > SIP settings . Select Optio ns > Edit and from the following: ⢠Profile na me â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default destin ation â Select the destination to use for the internet connection. ⢠Default access point â Select the ac cess point to us e for the internet connection. ⢠Public us er name â Enter y our user name prov ided by your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the re gistration mode. ⢠Use secur ity â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy se rver â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar se rver â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP prof ile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermed iate servers between a browsing service and its use rs used by some se rvice providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy serv er address â Enter th e host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Password â Enter your user nam e and password for th e prox y serve r. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. 128 Settings
Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User na me and Password â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Automatic or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Configuration settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information ma nagement containing configuration settings for tr usted servers. These settings are automatically save d in Configurations. You m ay receive configuration settings for access points, multimedia or e-mail messaging services, or synchronization settings from trusted servers. To delete configu rations fo r a trusted serv er, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to certain access points only. Your SIM card may not sup port the access point control service. For more information, contact your service provider. To restrict packet data connections fr om your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need y our PIN2 code to activate and deacti vate access point control or to edit the packet data acce ss points on the control list. To add access points that can be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator- provided access point, cre ate an emp ty access point. To remove access points from the list, select Optio ns > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Applications . Select an application from the list to adjust its settings. 129 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Sym key. Press and hold to activate or deactivate Bluetooth conne ctivity. Ctrl key Press and hold to activate or deactivate the Silent profile. Ctrl C Copy text. Ctrl V Paste text. Ctrl X Cut text. Ctrl A Select all. Home screen Left selection key right selection key Lock and unlock the keypad and keyboard. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your homepage in the Web browser. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. You must first a ctivate 1- touch dialing in Menu > Ctrl. panel and Settings > Phone > Call > 1- touch dialing . Web shortcuts * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 0 Go to the homepage. 1 Show the toolbar 2 Open the search dialog. 3 Return to the previous page. 4 Save the current web page as a bookmark. 5 Open the map of keypad shortcuts. 6 Reload the current page. 7 View the page in full screen. 130 Shortcuts
8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. E-mail C Create a new e-mail message. D Remove the selected e-mail messages. R Create a reply message to the sender of the e-mail message. A Create a reply message to the sender and all other recipients. F Forward the e-mail message. N Open the next e-mail message. P Open the previous e-mail message. O Open the s elected e-mail message. L C hange the follow-up status of the message. J Move up one page in the e-mail message. K Move down one page in the e-mail message. T Move to the first e-mail message in the mailbox or move to the beginning of an e-mail message. B Move to the last e-mail message in the mailbox or mov e to the end of an e- mail messag e. M Open the list of e-mail folders for moving messa ges. U Change the read or unread status of an e-mail mess age. E Accept a meeting request. G Tentatively accept a meeting reques t. V Decline a meeting request. W Sort e-mail messages. I Expand and collapse t he messages. Z Start the synchronization. S Start the sea rch. Calendar shortcuts for keyboard A Open the agenda view. D Open the day view. W Open the week view. M Open the month view. T Open the to-do view. N Add a new meeting. 131 Shortcuts
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobi le communications. A digital system for mobile communications which aims at global use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wi de variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN networ k mode where two or more devices connect to each other using WLAN directly without a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your visits to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to eva luate your use of the web site, what you are interested in, what you want to read and so on. DNS Domain name service. An internet service that translates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195. Domain names are easier to remember but this t ranslation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. EAP Extensible authentication protocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless ne tworks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication servers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to GPRS, but it enables fast er connection. For availability and data transfer speed, contact your service provider. GPRS General packet radio service. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection setup and fast data transmis sion speeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and s ubscription to GPRS , contact your service provider. During a voice call, you cannot est ablish a GPRS connection, and an y existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network supports dual transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigation system. 132 Glossary
HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings hig h-speed data delivery to 3G terminals, en suring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously unavailable because of limitations in the ra dio access network. HTTP Hypertext transfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructure operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WLA N access point. PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unauthorized use. The PIN cod e is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code reques t is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digit s long . PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. The length of th e PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digit s. POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blo cked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Prot ocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying and terminati ng certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from the web without downloading them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UM TS is a 3G mobile communication system. Besides voice and data, UMTS enab les audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same 133 Glossary
time, and access points can s hare a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultaneously spea king on the phone. UPIN P IN code used in UMTS net work. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an applicati on or configure various s ettings remo tely, that you can send to your oper ator or servi ce provid er with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilita te phone calls over an IP network, such as the internet. VPN Virtual private network. VPN creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-mail. WAP Wireless applicat ion protocol. WAP is an international standard for wireless communication . WEP Wired equivalent privacy. W EP is an encryption method that encrypts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security method for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security method for WLAN. 134 Glossary
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked questions about your device, go to www.nokia.com/support. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your d evice dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. S croll to the application and press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, di scolored, or bright dots appear on the screen ev ery time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth conn ectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between th e two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I close a Bluetooth connecti on? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can close the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivi ty. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivity > Bluetooth and Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the network on you r Nokia device. Check that the WLAN access point is not on ch annels 12-13, as they cannot be ass ociated with. Q: How do I turn off the WLA N on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device deactivates when you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can speci fy that your Nokia device does not sca n, or scans less often, for available networks in the bac kground. The WLAN deactivates in between background scans. 135 Troubleshooting
To stop the background scan s, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connecti on > Wireles s LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available W LANs and connect to WLANs as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes and define the interva l in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is work ing and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have defined the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy settings correctly in the adva nced settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the signal qualit y of my WLAN connection? â Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. and Active d ata connections > Options > Details . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may encounter connection problems. Try agai n closer to the access point. Q: Why do I have problems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured the security mode correctly, and that it is the same that t he network uses. To check the security mode the network us es, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Connectivit y > Conn. mgr. and Active data conne ctions > Op tions > Details . Check also the following: you have the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, user na mes, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I s elect a contac t for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e-ma il address. Select Menu > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is s hown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging center. This note is shown if you have selected Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging ar e defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connectio n again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message center. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval > Ma nual t o h a v e t h e multimedia messagin g center save messa ges to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multim edia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message center. If you select Off , the device does not make any n etwork connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application o r action that needs it, select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connecti on > 136 Troubleshooting
Packet data > Packet dat a connection > When needed . If this does not help, restart the device. Q: How do I save battery p ower? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Deactivate Bluetooth connectivity when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the backgrou nd scans for WL AN. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and Connection > Wireles s LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available W LANs and connect to WLANs as usual. ⢠Set the device to us e a pack et data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settin gs and Connection > Packet dat a > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloading new maps in the Maps a pplication. Se lect Menu > Maps and Opti ons > Settings > Interne t > Connection . ⢠Change the time-out after whi ch the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Ctrl. panel > Settings and General > Personaliz ation > Displ ay > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you ar e not using. Press and hold the home key. Scro ll to the appl ication, and pres s the backspace key to close the application. 137 Troubleshooting
Green tips Save energy You do not need to charge your batt ery so often if you do the following (if available for your device): ⢠Close applications and data connections, for example, your Bluetoot h connection, when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set your device to enter power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity , if available in your device. ⢠Deactivate unneces sary sounds, such as key tone s. Recycle All materials of this device can be recovered as materials and energy. For information on how to recycle your old Nokia products, go to w ww.nokia.com/werecycle, or using a cellular phone, www. nokia.mobi/werecycle. Recycle packaging and user guid es at your local recycling scheme. For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, go to www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration . 138 Green tips
Product and safety information Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-4L. Nokia may make additional battery models available for this device. This device is intend ed for use when supplied with power from the following char gers: AC-8, AC-10. The exact charger model number may va ry depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the t alk and standby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved charg ers designated for this device. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a pr olonged period, it may be necessary to connect the char ger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the batte ry. If the battery is completely disch arged, it may take s everal minutes before the charging indicato r appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper cha rging. Unplu g the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not i n use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, si nce overcharging may shorten its li fetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Avoid extreme temperatures. Alw ays try to keep the battery between 59ðF and 77ðF (15ðC and 25ðC). Extreme temperatures reduce the capa city and lifetime of the battery. A device with a hot or cold batt ery may not work temporarily. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the po sitive ( ) and negat ive (-) terminals of the battery. (Thes e look like metal strips on the battery.) Th is might hap pe n, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the term inals may damag e the battery or the connecting object. Disposal. Do no t dispose of batte ries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle wh en possible. Do not dispose as househo ld waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery li quid contact with skin or eyes. If t his happens, flush the affected areas imm ediately with water, or seek medical help. 139 Product and safety information
Damage. Do not modify, reman ufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery or imm erse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batte ries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpose. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a servic e center for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small child ren. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia ba tteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from a Nokia authorized service center or dealer, and inspect the hologr am label using the following steps: Authenticate hol ogram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you shou ld see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the No kia Original Accessories logo when looking from an other ang le. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you have any reason to believe that your Nokia battery with the h ologram on the label is not an authentic Nokia battery, you shou ld refrain from using it , and take it to the nearest Nokia authorized servi ce center or dealer for assistance. For additional information, refer to the warranty and reference leaflet included with your Nokia device. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your w arranty covera ge. ⢠Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain mine rals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, a nd allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electr onic components can be damaged. 140 Product and safety information
⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperatyre . High temperatures can shor ten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. When the device warms to its normal temperatur e from a cold tem peratur e, moistur e can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards . ⢠Do not attempt to open the device oth er than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the devi ce. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may viola te regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimu m performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return yo ur used electronic pr oducts, batteri es, and packaging mat erials to dedicated collection points. This way you help prevent uncont rolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/ werecycle, or http:// nokia.mobi/werecycle. Additional safety information The surface of this device is nickel-free. Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. K eep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposu re guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body-worn operation should not contain metal and should position the devi ce the above-stated distance from your body. To send data file s or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Data files or messages may be 141 Product and safety information
delayed until such a connect ion is available. Follow the separation dista nce instruct ions until the transmission is completed . Parts of th e device are magnetic. M etallic materials ma y be attracted to the device. Do not pla ce credit cards or other magnetic s torage media near th e device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of radio transmit ting equipment, including wireless phones, may interf ere with the function of inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Swit ch off your device when regulations po sted instruct you to do so. Hospit als or health care facilities ma y use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimet ers (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) fr om the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer di rections for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using you r wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your hea lth care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless device s may int erfere with some hearing aids . Vehicles RF signals may affect i mproper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the ma n ufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate your warranty. Check regularly that all wire less device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, ga ses, or explosive materials in the same co mpartment as the device, its parts , or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployme nt are a. Switch off your device before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the airc raft and may be illegal. 142 Product and safety information
Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Obey a ll posted instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Swit ch off the device at refu eling points such as near gas pumps at serv ice stations. Observe restrictions in fuel depots, st orage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Area s with a potentially e xplosive atmosph ere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where you would be advise d to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boats, chemical t ransfer or storage facilities and where the air co ntains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or met al powders. You should chec k with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propa ne or butane) to determine if this device can be safe ly used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: T h i s d e v i c e o p e r a t e s using rad io signals , wireless networks, landli ne networks and user- programmed functions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (internet ca lls), activate both th e internet calls and the cellular phone. The device may a ttempt to make emergency calls over bo th the cellular networks and through your internet call prov ider if both are activated. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications li ke medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, sw itch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Depe nding on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from Offline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency ca ll, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of co mmunication at the scene of an accide nt. Do not end the call until given p ermission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets gu idelines for expos ure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a rad io transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by intern ational guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independen t scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. 143 Product and safety information
The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit s tated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an opera t ing device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for us e of the device at the ear is 1.31 W/kg . Use of device accessories ma y result in different SAR values. SAR values ma y vary depending on national reporting and testing requ irements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. Your mobile device is also designed to meet the requirements for exposure to radio waves established by the Federal Communication s Commission (USA) a nd Industry Canada. These requirem ents set a SAR limit of 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.39 W/kg and when properly worn on the body is 0.88 W/kg . 144 Product and safety information
Index Symbols/Numbers 1-touch dialing 32 3-D ringing tones 87 802.1x security settin gs 126 A A-GPS (assisted GPS) 72 Access codes 12 access points 54, 122 groups 123 VPN 115 accessories settings 119 active notes 66 settings 66 active toolbar in Photos 94 albums media 94 alert ton es 117 answering calls 31 antennas 16 application manage r 111 application set tings 129 application s 111 assisted GP S (A-GPS) 72 attachments multimedia messages 47 audio files details 103 audio messages 45 audio themes 8 7 autolock period 1 19 B background image 87 backing up device memory 67 battery charging 17 inserting 15 saving power 13 blogs 62 Bluetooth 56, 57 Bluetoo th conne ctivity blocking devices 58 device visibility 56 low memory 58 pairing devices 57 receiving data 58 security 56 settings 56 turning on/off 56 bookmarks 63 browser 63 bookmark 61 bookmarks 63 browsing pages 61, 62 cache memory 63 searching cont ent 62 security 63 settings 64 toolbar 61 C cable connection 59 cache memory 63 calculator 66 calendar 26 creating entries 26 meeting requests 26 views 27 calendar key 25 call forward 32 call log 38 call restriction 33 call waitin g 32 caller ID 121 calls 30 answering 31 conference 31 dialed 38 duration of 38 missed 38 options 30 received 38 rejecting 31 restricting See fixed dialing 145 Index
settings 121 voice mail 31 camera capturing images 89 image settings 91 playing videos 91 scenes 89 sequence mode 90 toolbar 89 video clips 90 video settings 91 viewing images 90 cell broadcast 48 settings 50 certificates details 109 settings 110 charging the b attery 17 chat services (IM) 51 computer connections 59 See also data connections conference calls 31 configuration messages 129 connectors 18 contacts 27, 28 adding ringing tones 28 copyin g 20 groups 28 searching 28 settings 29 synchronizing 55, 114 contacts key 25 content synchronizing, sending, and retri evin g 20 converting currencies 6 8 measurements 68 cookies 63 currency conversions 68 customizing your device 85 D data cable 5 9 data connections PC connectivity 59 synchronization 55, 114 wireless 53 date settings 118 declining calls 31 decrypting device memory and memory card 108 device manager 110 dialed numbers 38 dictionary 70 dismissing calls 31 display settings 117 DLNA 59 duration of calls 38 E e-mail 41 accounts 43 adding attach ments 42 attachments 42 deleting 43 disconnecting 43 folders 4 3 out-of-office reply 43 reading 42 searching 43 sending 41 settings 44 setup 41 e-mail key 25 e-mail ke y settings 1 20 EAP plug-in setting s 127 using an EAP plug-in 127 encrypting device memory and memory card 108 equalizer 102 F feeds, news 62 file management 67 file manager 67 files flash files 103 fixed dialing 108 flashlight 29 FM radio 104 G gallery 92 presentations 9 2 sound clips 92 streaming links 92 general information 10 146 Index
GPRS settings 125 GPS position requests 73 GPS (Global Positioning System) 72 GPS (global pos itioning system) 72 H headset 19 help application 11 home key 25 home screen 23, 24 settings 86 I IAPs (internet access points) 54 IM (instant messaging) 51 images editing 96 printing 97 installing applications 112 internet browser 61 Internet calls 121 internet connection 61 See also browser internet radio 105 favorites 10 5 searching for stations 106 settings 106 station directory 106 J Java applications 111 JME Java application support 111 K key store 110 keypad lock settings 119 tones 117 keys 18 WEP keys 126 L landmarks 74 langua ge settings 118 licenses 114 location information 72 lock code 12, 17, 107, 1 19 locking device 107 device autolock 119 keypad 119 logos welcome logo 117 M Maps 76 browsing 76 changing views 77 compass 77 display elements 77, 82 downloading maps 77 driving routes 81 Favorites 80 finding locations 78 navigating 81, 83 organizing places 80 organizing routes 80 planning routes 83 positioning 78 saving places 79 saving routes 79 sending p laces 80 sharing locations 81 shortcuts 84 synchronizing 80 traffic information 82 viewing location details 79 voice guidance 81 walking routes 83 measurements converting 68 media radio 104 meeting reques ts receiving 43 memory clearing 14 web cache 63 memory card 16 locking 107 passwords 107 message reader 44 messages 40 cell broadcast s ettings 50 configuration messages 129 service messages 48 147 Index
settings 50 speech options 44 text message setti ngs 49 messaging folder s 40 Mini Map 62 MMS (multimedia message service) 45, 49 multimed ia 92 multimed ia messages 45, 49 attachments 47 creating presentations 46 receiving 46 reply ing t o 46 multitas king 29 music pla yer playing 100 playlists 101 N navigati on tools 72 network settings 121 network setting s 52 news feeds 62 Nokia Ovi Player 101 Nokia support inf ormation 10 notes 70 O One-touch keys 118 operato r selecting 121 Optical N avi key 25 original settings 120 out-of-offi ce reply 43 Ovi by Nokia 22 Ovi Music 101 Ovi Store 22 Ovi Suite 21 P packet data restricting 129 settings 125 packet data connection access point settings 123 counters 38 page overview 62 PDF reader 68 personalizati on changing lang uage 118 display 117 tones 117 photos editing 9 6 file details 94 organizing files 94 red-eye 9 6 tags 95 toolbar 9 4 viewing 93 PictBridge 97 pictures copying 20 PIN code 12, 17 changing 119 PIN2 code 12 playing video and audio 102 positionin g settings 120 positioning i nformation 72 positionin g settings 7 5 predict ive text inpu t 118 present ations 46, 92 printer settings 69 printing 69 images 97 profiles creating 85 customizing 86 personalizing 85 selecting ringing tones 85 proxy settings 123 PUK code 12 R radio 104 settings 104 stations 104 RealPlayer playing media clips 1 02 settings 103 viewing clip details 103 red-eye removal 96 rejecting calls 31 remote configuration 110 remote database search 28 remote lock 107 remote SIM mo de 58 restoring original settings 120 148 Index
ringing tones 117 3-D 87 contacts 28 in profiles 85 vibrating alert 117 roaming 5 2 S screen saver 87, 117 scroll key 118 searching contacts 28 security browser 63 device and SIM card 119 memory card 107 security code 12, 107 security module 110 sensor settings 26, 119 service commands 48 service messages 48 settings 50 settings access points 122, 123 accessories 119 active notes 66 advanced WLAN 125 applications 129 Bluetooth connectivity 56 browser 64 calling 121 camera 91 cell broadcast 50 certificate 110 contacts 29 date 118 display 117 e-mail key 120 EAP plug-ins 127 FM radio 104 GPRS 125 internet radio 106 keypad lock 119 language 118 lights 118 messages 49 network 52, 121 packet data 125 packet data access poi nts 123 positioning 75, 120 printer 69 RealPlayer 103 restoring 120 security 119 sensor setting s 11 9 service messages 50 SIP 128 text messages 49 time 118 tones 117 video sharing 3 6 WEP security 126 WLAN 55, 124, 125 WLAN internet access points 124 WLAN security 126 Share online 97 account settings 100 accounts 98 activating services 98 advanced settings 100 creating posts 98 data counters 100 one-click upload 99 Outbox 99 posting 98 service content 99 service provider settings 99 subsc ribin g 98 tags 99 shared video 35 sharing media files online 97 shortcuts 84, 130 SIM card inserting 15 text messages 46 SIP creating profiles 128 editing profiles 12 8 editing proxy servers 128 editing registration servers 129 settings 128 slide show 95 SMS (short message service) 45 software updating 11 software applications 1 11 software updates 10, 11 sound clips 92 speech 44 streaming links 92 support 10 Symbian applications 111 synchronization of data 55, 114 149 Index
T text changing si ze 117 writing 19 text message s messages on S IM card 46 sending 45 settings 49 themes 87 audio 87 downloadi ng 87 time settings 118 tones 117 settings 117 transferring content 20 transferring music 101 troubleshooti ng 135 U updates 11 applications 10 device software 10 UPIN cod e 12 changing 119 uploading media files 97 UPUK code 12 USB data c able 59 useful info rmation 10 V vibrating alert 117 video playing 91 video calls 34, 35 options during 35 video clips details 103 playing 102 shared 35 video sharing accepting invitation 37 sharing live video 36 sharing video clips 36 videos copying 20 virtual private network use in applications 116 voice calls See calls voice commands 33 voice mail calling 31 changing number 31 VPN access points 115 use in applications 116 W warning ton es 117 web browser 61 web connection 61 welcome note 117 WEP keys 126 security settings 126 wireless LAN (WLA N) 5 3 WLAN 802.1x security settings 126 advanced setti ngs 125 MAC address 55, 125 security settings 126 settings 55, 125 WEP keys 126 WPA security settings 127 WLAN (wireles s local area network) 53 WPA security settings 127 wrist strap 19 writing 19 Z Zip manager 68 150 Index